Handleiding Opel Astra K 2022 (pagina 304 van 305) (Engels)

795828

304

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/305

Pagina verder

Owner's Manual

Introduction .................................... 2

In brief ............................................ 6

Keys, doors and windows ............ 21

Seats, restraints ........................... 48

Storage ........................................ 73

Instruments and controls ............. 92

Lighting ...................................... 130

Climate control ........................... 141

Driving and operating ................. 151

Vehicle care ............................... 222

Service and maintenance .......... 272

Technical data ........................... 275

Customer information ................ 287

Index .......................................... 298

Contents

2 Introduction

Introduction

Introduction 3

Vehicle specific data

Please enter your vehicle's data on

the previous page to keep it easily

accessible.

Refer to the sections "Service and

maintenance", "Technical data", the

vehicle’s identification plate and

national registration documents.

Introduction

Your vehicle is a designed

combination of advanced technology,

safety, environmental friendliness

and economy.

This Owner's Manual provides you

with all the necessary information to

enable you to drive your vehicle

safely and efficiently.

Make sure your passengers are

aware of the possible risk of accident

and injury which may result from

improper use of the vehicle.

You must always comply with the

specific laws and regulations of the

country that you are in. These laws

may differ from the information in this

Owner's Manual.

Disregarding the description given in

this manual may affect your warranty.

When this Owner's Manual refers to a

workshop visit, we recommend your

Opel Service Partner.

For gas vehicles we recommend an

Opel Repairer authorised for

servicing gas vehicles.

All Opel Service Partners provide

first-class service at reasonable

prices. Experienced mechanics

trained by Opel work according to

specific Opel instructions.

The customer literature pack should

always be kept ready to hand in the

vehicle.

Using this manual

● This manual describes all options

and features available for this

model. Certain descriptions,

including those for display and

menu functions, may not apply to

your vehicle due to model

variant, country specifications,

special equipment or

accessories.

● The "In brief" section will give you

an initial overview.

● The table of contents at the

beginning of this manual and

within each section shows where

the information is located.

● The index will enable you to

search for specific information.

● This Owner's Manual depicts left-

hand drive vehicles. Operation is

similar for right-hand drive

vehicles.

● The Owner's Manual uses the

engine identifier code. The

corresponding sales designation

and engineering code can be

found in the section "Technical

data".

● Directional data, e.g. left or right,

or front or back, always relate to

the direction of travel.

● Displays may not support your

specific language.

● Display messages and interior

labelling are written in bold

letters.

4 Introduction

Danger, Warnings and

Cautions

9Danger

Text marked 9 Danger provides

information on risk of fatal injury.

Disregarding this information may

endanger life.

9Warning

Text marked 9 Warning provides

information on risk of accident or

injury. Disregarding this

information may lead to injury.

Caution

Text marked Caution provides

information on possible damage to

the vehicle. Disregarding this

information may lead to vehicle

damage.

Symbols

Page references are indicated with 3.

3 means "see page".

Page references and index entries

refer to the indented headings given

in the section table of content.

Chronological order to select menu

entries in the vehicle personalisation

is indicated with I.

We wish you many hours of

pleasurable driving.

Your Opel Team

Introduction 5

6 In brief

In brief

Initial drive information

Vehicle unlocking

Press c to unlock the doors and load

compartment. Open the doors by

pulling the handles.

Tailgate

5-door Hatchback: to open the

tailgate, push the tailgate button

below the brand emblem.

Sports Tourer: to open the tailgate,

push the tailgate button under the

tailgate moulding.

Radio remote control 3 22.

Central locking system 3 25.

Electronic key system 3 23.

Load compartment 3 32.

In brief 7

Seat adjustment

Longitudinal adjustment

Pull handle, slide seat, release

handle. Try to move the seat back and

forth to ensure that the seat is locked

in place.

Seat position 3 49.

Manual seat adjustment 3 50.

Power seat adjustment 3 52.

Backrests inclination

Turn handwheel. Do not lean on

backrest when adjusting.

Seat position 3 49.

Manual seat adjustment 3 50.

Power seat adjustment 3 52.

Seat height

Lever pumping motion

up : seat higher

down : seat lower

Seat position 3 49.

Manual seat adjustment 3 50.

Power seat adjustment 3 52.

8 In brief

Seat inclination

Press switch

top : front end higher

bottom : front end lower

Seat position 3 49.

Manual seat adjustment 3 50.

Power seat adjustment 3 52.

Head restraint adjustment

Press release button, adjust height,

engage.

Head restraints 3 48.

Seat belt

Pull out the seat belt and fasten in belt

buckle. The seat belt must not be

twisted and must fit close against the

body. The backrest must not be tilted

back too far (maximum approx. 25°).

To unfasten belt, press red button on

belt buckle.

Seat position 3 49.

Seat belts 3 58.

Airbag system 3 60.

In brief 9

Mirror adjustment

Interior mirror

To adjust the mirror, move the mirror

housing in the desired direction.

Manual anti-dazzle interior mirror

3 42.

Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror

3 42.

Exterior mirrors

Select the relevant exterior mirror by

switching the rocker control to left

mirror (L) or right mirror (R). Adjust

respective mirror by the four-way

control.

Convex exterior mirrors 3 40.

Electric adjustment 3 40.

Folding exterior mirrors 3 41.

Heated exterior mirrors 3 41.

Steering wheel adjustment

Unlock the lever, adjust the steering

wheel, then engage the lever and

ensure it is fully locked.

Do not adjust the steering wheel

unless the vehicle is stationary and

the steering wheel lock has been

released.

Airbag system 3 60.

Ignition positions 3 152.

10 In brief

Instrument panel overview

In brief 11

1Power windows ..................... 43

2Exterior mirrors ..................... 40

3Central locking system .......... 25

4Side air vents ...................... 149

5Cruise control ..................... 176

Speed limiter ....................... 177

Adaptive cruise control ....... 179

Forward collision alert ......... 187

6Turn lights, headlight

flash, low / high beam,

high beam assist ................. 136

Exit lighting ......................... 139

Parking lights ...................... 137

Buttons for Driver

Information Centre .............. 115

7Instruments ........................ 104

Driver Information Centre .... 115

8Buttons for Driver

Information Centre .............. 115

9Windscreen wiper and

washer, rear wiper and

washer ................................. 94

10 Centre air vents ................... 149

11 Info Display ......................... 121

12 Anti-theft alarm system

status LED ........................... 37

13 Hazard warning flashers .... 135

14 Glovebox .............................. 73

15 Controls for Info Display

operation ............................. 121

16 Climate control system ........ 141

17 Fuse box ............................ 244

18 Traction Control system ..... 173

Electronic Stability Control . 174

Parking assist / Advanced

parking assist ..................... 195

Lane keep assist ................ 210

Eco button for stop-start

system ................................. 157

19 Manual transmission .......... 169

Automatic transmission ...... 166

20 Power outlet .......................... 99

21 Parking brake ...................... 171

22 Power button ....................... 153

23 Ignition switch ..................... 152

24 Steering wheel adjustment ..93

25 Horn ..................................... 94

26 Bonnet release lever .......... 224

27 Storage compartment ........... 74

28 Light switch ........................ 130

Headlight range

adjustment ......................... 133

Front / rear fog lights .......... 136

Instrument illumination ....... 137

12 In brief

In brief 13

Exterior lighting

AUTO : automatic light control

switches automatically

between daytime running

light and headlight

8: sidelights

9: headlights

Automatic light control 3 131.

Front fog lights 3 136.

Rear fog light 3 136.

Headlight flash, high beam and

low beam

headlight flash : pull lever

high beam : push lever

low beam : push or pull lever

High beam 3 133.

Headlight flash 3 133.

LED headlights 3 134.

High beam assist 3 134.

Turn lights

lever up : right turn lights

lever down : left turn lights

Turn lights 3 136.

Parking lights 3 137.

14 In brief

Hazard warning flashers

Operated by pressing ¨.

Hazard warning flashers 3 135.

Horn

Press j.

Washer and wiper systems

Windscreen wiper

HI : fast

LO : slow

INT : interval wiping

automatic wiping with rain

sensor

OFF : off

For single wipe when the wiper is off,

press lever down to position 1x.

Windscreen wiper 3 94.

In brief 15

Windscreen washer

Pull lever.

Windscreen washer system 3 94.

Washer fluid 3 227.

Wiper blade replacement 3 230.

Rear window wiper

OFF : off

INT : intermittent operation

ON : continuous operation

Rear window washer

Push lever.

Washer fluid is sprayed on the rear

window and the wiper wipes a few

times.

Rear window wiper and washer

3 96.

16 In brief

Climate control

Heated rear window

The heating is operated by pressing

Ü.

Heated rear window 3 45.

Heated exterior mirrors

Pressing Ü also activates the heated

exterior mirrors.

Heated exterior mirrors 3 41.

Heated windscreen

Operated by pressing ,.

Heated windscreen 3 45.

Demisting and defrosting the

windows

●Press V: the air distribution is

directed towards the windscreen.

● Set fan speed to highest level.

● Set temperature control to

warmest level.

●Switch on heated rear window Ü.

● Open side air vents as required

and direct them towards the door

windows.

Air conditioning system 3 141.

In brief 17

Demisting and defrosting the

windows, electronic climate

control

Press V.

Temperature and air distribution are

set automatically and the fan runs at

high speed.

Switch on heated rear window Ü.

Electronic climate control system

3 143.

Transmission

Manual transmission

Reverse: with the vehicle stationary,

depress clutch pedal and press the

release button on the selector lever

and engage the gear.

Manual transmission 3 169.

Automatic transmission

P: park position

R: reverse

N: neutral mode

D: automatic mode

M: manual mode

<: upshift

]: downshift

The selector lever can only be moved

out of P when the ignition is on and

the brake pedal is applied. To engage

P or R, press the release button.

Automatic transmission 3 166.

18 In brief

Starting off

Check before starting off

● tyre pressure 3 249 and

condition 3 285

● engine oil level and fluid levels

3 225

● all windows, mirrors, exterior

lighting and number plates are

free from dirt, snow and ice and

are operational

● proper position of mirrors 3 40,

seats 3 49 and seat belts

3 59

● brake function at low speed,

particularly if the brakes are wet

Starting the engine

Ignition switch

● Turn key to position 2.

● Move the steering wheel slightly

to release the steering wheel

lock.

● Manual transmission: operate

clutch and brake pedal.

Automatic transmission: operate

brake pedal and move selector

lever to P or N.

● Do not operate accelerator pedal.

● Diesel engines: wait until control

indicator ! for preheating

extinguishes.

● Turn key to position 3 and

release after engine has been

started.

Starting the engine 3 155.

To turn the key back from position 2

to 1 or 0, first push the key all the way

in towards the steering column.

Power button

● Press Engine Start/Stop for a few

seconds until green LED

illuminates.

● Move the steering wheel slightly

to release the steering wheel

lock.

● Manual transmission: operate

clutch and brake pedal.

Automatic transmission: operate

brake pedal and move selector

lever to P or N.

● Do not operate accelerator pedal.

● Diesel engines: wait until control

indicator ! for preheating

extinguishes.

In brief 19

● Press Engine Start/Stop and

release.

Starting the engine 3 155.

Stop-start system

If the vehicle is at a low speed or at a

standstill and certain conditions are

fulfilled, an Autostop is activated.

An Autostop is indicated by the

needle at the AUTOSTOP position in

the tachometer.

Stop-start system 3 157.

Parking

9Warning

● Do not park the vehicle on an

easily ignitable surface. The

high temperature of the

exhaust system could ignite the

surface.

● Always apply the parking

brake. Activate the manual

parking brake without pressing

the release button. Apply as

firmly as possible on a downhill

slope or uphill slope. Depress

brake pedal at the same time to

reduce operating force.

For vehicles with electric

parking brake, pull switch m for

a minimum of 1 second until

control indicator m illuminates

constantly and electric parking

brake is applied 3 110.

● Switch off the engine.

● If the vehicle is on a level

surface or uphill slope, engage

first gear or set the selector

20 In brief

lever to position P before

removing the ignition key or

switching off ignition on

vehicles with power button. On

an uphill slope, turn the front

wheels away from the kerb.

If the vehicle is on a downhill

slope, engage reverse gear or

set the selector lever to position

P before removing the ignition

key or switching off ignition on

vehicles with power button.

Turn the front wheels towards

the kerb.

● Close the windows and the

sunroof.

● Remove the ignition key from

the ignition switch or switch off

ignition on vehicles with power

button. Turn the steering wheel

until the steering wheel lock is

felt to engage.

For vehicles with automatic

transmission, the key can only

be removed when the selector

lever is in position P.

●Lock the vehicle with e on the

radio remote control.

Activate the anti-theft alarm

system 3 37.

● The engine cooling fans may run

after the engine has been

switched off 3 224.

Caution

After running at high engine

speeds or with high engine loads,

operate the engine briefly at a low

load or run in neutral for

approx. 30 seconds before

switching off, in order to protect

the turbocharger.

Keys, locks 3 21.

Laying-up the vehicle for a long

period of time 3 223.

Keys, doors and windows 21

Keys, doors and

windows

Keys, locks ................................... 21

Keys .......................................... 21

Radio remote control ................. 22

Electronic key system ................ 23

Memorised settings ................... 25

Central locking system .............. 25

Automatic locking ...................... 30

Child locks ................................. 31

Doors ........................................... 32

Load compartment .................... 32

Vehicle security ............................ 37

Anti-theft locking system ........... 37

Anti-theft alarm system .............. 37

Immobiliser ................................ 40

Exterior mirrors ............................ 40

Convex shape ........................... 40

Electric adjustment .................... 40

Folding mirrors .......................... 41

Heated mirrors ........................... 41

Interior mirrors ............................. 42

Manual anti-dazzle .................... 42

Automatic anti-dazzle ................ 42

Windows ...................................... 42

Windscreen ............................... 42

Manual windows ........................ 43

Power windows ......................... 43

Heated rear window .................. 45

Heated windscreen .................... 45

Sun visors .................................. 45

Roof ............................................. 46

Sunroof ...................................... 46

Keys, locks

Keys

Caution

Do not attach heavy or bulky items

to the ignition key.

Replacement keys

The key number is specified on a

detachable tag.

The key number must be quoted

when ordering replacement keys as it

is a component of the immobiliser

system.

Locks 3 267.

Central locking 3 25.

Starting the engine 3 155.

Radio remote control 3 22.

Electronic key 3 23.

The code number of the adapter for

the locking wheel nuts is specified on

a card. It must be quoted when

ordering a replacement adapter.

Wheel changing 3 258.

22 Keys, doors and windows

Key with foldaway key section

Press button to extend. To fold the

key, first press the button.

Radio remote control

Enables operation of the following

functions via the use of the remote

control buttons:

● central locking system 3 25

● anti-theft locking system 3 37

● anti-theft alarm system 3 37

● power windows 3 43

● sunroof 3 46

The remote control has a range of up

to 100 m, but may also be much less

due to external influences. The

hazard warning flashers confirm

operation.

Handle with care, protect from

moisture and high temperatures and

avoid unnecessary operation.

Replacing battery in radio remote

control

Replace the battery as soon as the

range reduces.

Batteries do not belong in household

waste. They must be disposed of at

an appropriate recycling collection

point.

Keys, doors and windows 23

1. Insert flat screwdriver into the slot

and separate the back cover from

the remote control by slightly

turning the screwdriver.

2. Remove and replace battery. Use

CR 2032 or equivalent battery.

Pay attention to the installation

position.

3. Insert the back cover in the area

of the key blade, fold down and

close.

Fault

If the central locking system cannot

be operated with the radio remote

control, the cause may be one of the

following:

● Fault in radio remote control.

● The range is exceeded.

● The battery voltage is too low.

● Frequent, repeated operation of

the radio remote control while not

in range, which will require re-

synchronisation.

● Overload of the central locking

system by operating at frequent

intervals, the power supply is

interrupted for a short time.

● Interference from higher-power

radio waves from other sources.

Manual unlocking 3 25.

Electronic key system

Enables a keyless operation of the

following functions:

● central locking system 3 25

● power tailgate 3 32

● ignition switching on and starting

the engine 3 155

The electronic key simply needs to be

on the driver's person.

Additionally, the electronic key

includes the functionality of the radio

remote control 3 22.

Handle with care, protect from

moisture and high temperatures and

avoid unnecessary operation.

24 Keys, doors and windows

Note

Do not put the electronic key into the

load compartment or in front of the

Info Display.

Activation and Deactivation

keyless unlocking

If equipped, keyless unlocking of the

exterior door handles and the boot

can be activated or deactivated.

To deactivate the keyless unlocking,

press and hold b a at the same time

on the electronic key for approx. 3

seconds. The turn lights will indicate

the deactivation by flashing four

times. Using any exterior door handle

to unlock the doors or the boot will

indicated the deactivation by the turn

lights flashing fourt times quickly. If

keyless unlocking is deactivated,

deactive the alarm system before

starting the vehicle.

To activate the keyless unlocking,

press and hold b a at the same time

on the electronic key for approx. 3

seconds. The turn lights will indicates

the activation by flashing quickly

twice.

Replacing battery in electronic

key

Replace the battery as soon as the

system no longer operates properly

or the range is reduced. The need for

battery replacement is indicated by a

message in the Driver Information

Centre 3 122.

Batteries do not belong in household

waste. They must be disposed of at

an appropriate recycling collection

point.

To replace:

1. Press button at the back of the

electronic key unit and extract the

key blade from the housing.

Keys, doors and windows 25

2. Insert the key blade again for

approx. 6 mm and turn the key to

open the housing. Further

insertion of the key blade can

damage the housing.

3. Remove and replace battery. Use

CR 2032 or equivalent battery.

Pay attention to the installation

position.

4. Close the housing and insert key

blade.

Electronic key synchronisation

The electronic key synchronises itself

automatically during every starting

procedure.

Fault

If the central locking cannot be

operated or the engine cannot be

started, the cause may be one of the

following:

● Fault in electronic key.

● Electronic key is out of reception

range.

● The battery voltage is too low.

● Overload of the central locking

system by operating at frequent

intervals, the power supply is

interrupted for a short time.

● Interference from higher-power

radio waves from other sources.

To rectify the cause of the fault,

change the position of the electronic

key.

Manual unlocking 3 25.

Memorised settings

Whenever the ignition is switched off,

some functions of the following

settings may be automatically

memorised by the remote control unit

or the electronic key:

● automatic climate control

● lighting

● Infotainment system

● central locking system

● comfort settings

The saved settings are automatically

used the next time the ignition is

switched on with the memorised key

of the remote control unit 3 152 or

electronic key 3 23.

A precondition is that Personalisation

by Driver is activated in the personal

settings of the Info Display. This must

be set for each remote control unit or

electronic key which is used. The

status change is available only after

locking and unlocking the vehicle.

The assigned memory position of the

power seat is automatically recalled

when switching on ignition and Auto

Memory Recall is activated in the

Info Display for the memorised

remote control or electronic key.

Power seat 3 52.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Central locking system

Unlocks and locks doors, load

compartment and fuel filler flap.

A pull on an interior door handle

unlocks the respective door. Pulling

the handle once more opens the door.

Note

In the event of an accident in which

airbags or belt pretensioners are

deployed, the vehicle is

automatically unlocked.

26 Keys, doors and windows

Note

A short time after unlocking with the

remote control the doors are locked

automatically if no door has been

opened. A precondition is that the

setting is activated in the vehicle

personalisation 3 124.

Remote control operation

Unlocking

Press c.

Unlocking mode can be set in the

vehicle personalisation menu in the

Info Display. Two settings are

selectable:

● All doors, load compartment and

fuel filler flap will be unlocked by

pressing c once.

● Only the driver's door and fuel

filler flap will be unlocked by

pressing c once. To unlock all

doors and load compartment,

press c twice.

Select the relevant setting in Settings

I Vehicle in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 121.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

The setting can be saved for the

remote control being used.

Memorised settings 3 25.

Unlocking and opening the tailgate

3 32.

Locking

Close doors, load compartment and

fuel filler flap.

Press e.

If the driver's door is not closed

properly, the central locking system

will not work.

Confirmation

Operation of the central locking

system is confirmed by the hazard

warning flashers. A precondition is

that the setting is activated in the

vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Keys, doors and windows 27

Electronic key system operation

The electronic key must be outside

the vehicle, within a range of approx.

1 m of the relevant door side.

Unlocking

Press the button on a front door

handle and pull the handle.

Unlocking mode can be set in the

vehicle personalisation menu in the

Info Display. Two settings are

selectable:

● All doors, load compartment and

fuel filler flap will be unlocked by

pressing the button on any

exterior handle once.

● Only the driver's door and fuel

filler flap will be unlocked by

pressing the button on the

driver's door exterior handle

once. To unlock all doors and

load compartment, press button

twice.

The setting can be changed in the

menu Settings in the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Locking

Press the button on a front door

handle.

All doors, load compartment and fuel

filler flap will be locked.

28 Keys, doors and windows

The system locks if any of the

following occurs:

● It has been more than

5 seconds since unlocking.

● The button on an exterior handle

has been pressed twice within

3 seconds to unlock the vehicle.

● Any door has been opened and

all doors are now closed.

If the driver's door is not closed

properly, the electronic key remains in

the vehicle or the ignition is not off,

locking will not be permitted.

If there have been two or more

electronic keys in the vehicle and the

ignition was on once, the doors will be

locked even if just one electronic key

is taken out of the vehicle.

Unlocking and opening the tailgate

The tailgate can be unlocked and

opened hands-free via moving the

foot below the rear bumper or by

pushing the tailgate button under the

brand emblem when the electronic

key is in range. The doors remain

locked.

Load compartment 3 32.

Operation with buttons on the

electronic key

The central locking system can also

be operated with the buttons on the

electronic key.

Press c to unlock.

Press e to lock.

Press X twice to unlock and open

only the power tailgate. To prevent

unintended opening of the tailgate,

X must be pressed longer than

during locking or unlocking.

Remote control operation 3 25.

Passive locking

Automatic locking 3 30.

Confirmation

Operation of central locking system is

confirmed by the hazard warning

flashers. A precondition is that the

setting is activated in the vehicle

personalisation 3 124.

Central locking buttons

Locks or unlocks all doors, the load

compartment and fuel filler flap from

the passenger compartment via a

switch in the driver's door panel.

Press e to lock.

Press c to unlock.

Keys, doors and windows 29

Operation with the key in case of

a central locking system fault

In case of a fault, e.g. vehicle battery

or remote control / electronic key

battery is discharged, the driver's

door can be locked or unlocked with

the mechanical key.

The lock cylinder in the driver's door

is covered by a cap.

Remote control: to remove the cap,

insert the key into the recess at the

bottom of the cap and swivel the key

upward.

Keys 3 21.

Electronic key: to remove the cap,

press button at the back and extract

the key blade from the housing. Insert

the key into the recess at the bottom

of the cap and swivel the key upward.

Electronic key system 3 23.

Manual unlocking

Manually unlock the driver's door by

inserting and turning the key in the

lock cylinder.

The other doors can be opened by

pulling the interior handle twice or by

pressing c in the driver's door panel.

The load compartment and fuel filler

flap will possibly not be unlocked.

By switching on the ignition, the anti-

theft locking system is deactivated.

30 Keys, doors and windows

Manual locking

Push inside locking knob of all doors

except driver's door or press e in the

driver's door panel. Then close the

driver's door and lock it from the

outside by turning the key in the lock

cylinder. The fuel filler flap and

tailgate are possibly not locked.

After locking, cover the lock cylinder

with the cap: insert the cap with the

lower side in the recesses, swivel and

push the cap until it engages at the

upper side.

Automatic locking

Automatic locking after driving off

This security feature can be

configured to automatically lock all

doors, load compartment and fuel

filler flap after driving off and

exceeding a certain speed.

When at a standstill after driving, the

vehicle will be unlocked automatically

as soon as the key is removed from

the ignition switch, or with electronic

key system when the ignition is

switched off.

Activation or deactivation of

automatic locking can be set in the

menu Settings I Vehicle in the Info

Display.

Info Display 3 121.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

The setting can be saved for the

remote control or electronic key being

used 3 25.

Automatic relock after unlocking

This feature can be configured to

automatically lock all doors, load

compartment and fuel filler flap a

short time after unlocking with the

remote control or electronic key,

provided no door has been opened.

Activation or deactivation of

automatic relock can be set in the

menu Settings I Vehicle in the Info

Display.

Info Display 3 121.

Keys, doors and windows 31

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

The setting can be saved for the

remote control or electronic key being

used 3 25.

Passive locking

On vehicles with electronic key

system, this feature locks the vehicle

automatically after several seconds if

an electronic key has been

recognised previously inside the

vehicle, all doors have then been

closed and the electronic key does

not remain within the vehicle.

If the electronic key remains in the

vehicle or the ignition is not off,

passive locking will not be permitted.

If there have been two or more

electronic keys in the vehicle and the

ignition was on once, the feature

locks the vehicle if just one electronic

key is taken out of the vehicle.

To prevent passive locking of the

vehicle e.g. when refuelling or if

passengers remain in the vehicle, the

system must be disabled.

To disable the system, press the

central locking button c for a few

seconds while one door is open. An

acoustic signal sounds three times to

confirm deactivation. The function

remains disabled until the central

locking button e is pressed or the

ignition is switched on.

Activation or deactivation of passive

locking can be set in the menu

Settings I Vehicle in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 121.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

The setting can be saved for the

electronic key being used 3 25.

Child locks

9Warning

Use the child locks whenever

children are occupying the rear

seats.

Move the pin in the rear door to the

front. The door cannot be opened

from the inside.

To deactivate, move the pin to the

rear position.

32 Keys, doors and windows

Doors

Load compartment

Tailgate

Opening

5-door Hatchback

After unlocking, push the tailgate

button under the brand emblem and

open the tailgate.

Sports Tourer

After unlocking, push the tailgate

button under the tailgate moulding

and open the tailgate manually.

Central locking system 3 25.

Closing

Use one of the interior handles.

Do not push the tailgate button whilst

closing as this will unlock the tailgate

again.

Central locking system 3 25.

Keys, doors and windows 33

Power tailgate

9Warning

Take care when operating the

power tailgate. Risk of injury,

particularly to children.

Keep a close watch on the

movable tailgate when operating.

Ensure that nothing becomes

trapped during operating and no

one is standing within the moving

area.

The power tailgate can be operated

by:

● Pressing X twice on the

electronic key. To prevent

unintended opening of the

tailgate, X must be pressed

longer than during locking or

unlocking.

● Hands-free operation with motion

sensor below the rear bumper.

● The tailgate button under the

exterior tailgate moulding and

C in the open tailgate.

● The switch C on the inside of

the driver's door.

On vehicles with automatic

transmission, the tailgate can only be

operated when the vehicle is

stationary and with selector lever in P.

The turn lights flash and a chime

sounds when the power tailgate is

operating.

Note

Operating the power tailgate does

not operate the central locking

system. To open the tailgate with the

button on the electronic key, or with

the tailgate button or via hands-free

operation, it is not necessary to

unlock the vehicle. A precondition is

that the electronic key is outside the

vehicle, within a range of approx.

1 m of the tailgate.

Do not leave the electronic key in the

load compartment.

Lock the vehicle after closing if it was

unlocked previously.

Central locking system 3 25.

Operation with the electronic key

Press X twice to open or close the

tailgate. To prevent unintended

opening of the tailgate, X must be

pressed longer than during locking or

unlocking.

34 Keys, doors and windows

Hands-free operation with motion

sensor below the rear bumper

To open or close the tailgate, move

the foot below the rear bumper back

and forth in the area shown in the

illustration. If equipped with parking

assist, the area is recognisable below

the sensor shown. Do not hold the

foot longer or move too slow below

the bumper. The electronic key must

be outside the vehicle, within a range

of approx. 1 m of the tailgate.

9Danger

Do not touch any vehicle parts

below the vehicle during hands-

free operation. There is a risk of

injury from hot engine parts.

Operation with the tailgate button

under the exterior tailgate moulding

To open the tailgate, press the

tailgate button under the tailgate

moulding until the tailgate starts to

move. If the vehicle is locked, the

electronic key must be outside the

vehicle, within a range of approx.

1 m of the tailgate.

To close, press C in the open

tailgate until the tailgate starts to

move.

Keys, doors and windows 35

Operation with the switch on the

inside of the driver's door

Press C on the inside of the driver's

door until the tailgate starts to open or

close.

Stop or change direction of

movement

To stop movement of the tailgate

immediately:

● press X once on the electronic

key, or

● press the tailgate button under

the exterior tailgate moulding, or

● press C on the open tailgate,

● press C on the inside of the

driver's door.

Pressing one of the switches again

will reverse the direction of

movement.

Operation modes

The power tailgate has three modes

of operation, which are controlled by

the switch C in the driver's door. To

change the mode, turn the switch:

● Normal mode MAX: Power

tailgate opens to full height.

● Intermediate mode 3/4: Power

tailgate opens to a reduced

height that can be adjusted.

● Mode Off: Tailgate can only be

operated manually.

Adjust reduced opening height in

intermediate mode

1. Turn operation mode switch to

3/4.

2. Open power tailgate with any

operation switch.

3. Stop movement at the desired

height by pressing any operation

switch. If required, manually move

the stopped tailgate to the desired

position.

36 Keys, doors and windows

4. Press and hold the button C on

the inside of the open tailgate for

3 seconds.

Note

Adjusting opening height should be

programmed at ground level.

A chime sound indicates the new

setting and the turn lights will flash.

The reduced height can only set at an

opening angle of above 30°.

When turning the adjuster wheel in

the driver's door to intermediate mode

3/4, the power tailgate will stop

opening at the newly set position.

The tailgate can only be held open if

a minimum height is exceeded

(minimum opening angle from 30°).

The opening height cannot be

programmed below that height.

Safety function

If the power tailgate encounters an

obstacle during opening or closing,

the direction of movement will

automatically be reversed slightly.

Multiple obstacles in one power cycle

will deactivate the function. In this

case, close or open the tailgate

manually.

The power tailgate has pinch sensors

on the side edges. If the sensors

detect obstacles between tailgate and

chassis, the tailgate will open, until it

is activated again or closed manually.

The safety function is indicated by a

warning chime.

Remove all obstacles before

resuming normal power operation.

If the vehicle is equipped with factory-

fitted towing equipment and a trailer

is electrically connected, the power

tailgate can only be opened with the

tailgate button or closed with G in

the open tailgate. Ensure that there

are no obstacles in the moving area.

Overload

If the power tailgate is repeatedly

operated at short intervals, the

function is disabled for some time.

Move tailgate manually into end

position to reset the system.

General hints for operating

tailgate

9Danger

Do not drive with the tailgate open

or ajar, e.g. when transporting

bulky objects, since toxic exhaust

gases, which cannot be seen or

smelled, could enter the vehicle.

This can cause unconsciousness

and even death.

Caution

Before opening the tailgate, check

overhead obstructions, e.g. a

garage door, to avoid damage to

Keys, doors and windows 37

the tailgate. Always check the

moving area above and behind the

tailgate.

Note

The installation of certain heavy

accessories onto the tailgate may

affect its ability to remain open.

Note

The operation of the power tailgate

is disabled under low vehicle battery

conditions. In this case, the tailgate

may not even by manually operable.

Note

With the power tailgate disabled and

all doors unlocked, the tailgate can

only be operated manually. In this

event, manually closing the tailgate

requires significantly greater force.

Note

At low outside temperatures the

tailgate may not open fully by itself.

In this event, lift the tailgate manually

to its normal end position.

Vehicle security

Anti-theft locking system

9Warning

Do not use the system if there are

people in the vehicle! The doors

cannot be unlocked from the

inside.

The system deadlocks all the doors.

All doors must be closed otherwise

the system cannot be activated.

Unlocking the vehicle disables the

mechanical anti-theft locking system.

This is not possible with the central

locking button.

Activating

Press e on the radio remote control

twice within 5 seconds.

Anti-theft alarm system

The anti-theft alarm system is

combined with the anti-theft locking

system.

It monitors:

● doors, tailgate, bonnet

● passenger compartment

including adjoining load

compartment

38 Keys, doors and windows

● vehicle inclination, e.g. if it is

raised

● ignition

Activation

All doors must be closed and the

electronic key of the electronic key

system must not remain in the

vehicle. Otherwise the system cannot

be activated.

● Radio remote control: activated

30 seconds after locking the

vehicle by pressing e once.

● Electronic key system: activated

30 seconds after locking the

vehicle by pressing the button on

any exterior door handle.

● Radio remote control or

electronic key: directly by

pressing e twice within

5 seconds.

● Electronic key system with

passive locking enabled: briefly

activated after passive locking

occurs.

Note

Changes to the vehicle interior such

as the use of seat covers, and open

windows or sunroof, could impair the

function of passenger compartment

monitoring.

Activation without monitoring of

passenger compartment and

vehicle inclination

Switch off the monitoring of

passenger compartment and vehicle

inclination when animals are being

left in the vehicle, because of high

volume ultrasonic signals or

movements triggering the alarm. Also

switch off when the vehicle is on a

ferry or train.

1. Close tailgate, bonnet, windows

and sunroof.

2. Press o. LED in the button o

illuminates for a maximum of

10 minutes.

Keys, doors and windows 39

3. Close doors.

4. Activate the anti-theft alarm

system.

Status message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

Status LED

Status LED is integrated in the sensor

on top of the instrument panel.

Status during the first 30 seconds of

anti-theft alarm system activation:

LED illuminates : test, arming delay

LED flashes

quickly : doors, tailgate or

bonnet not

completely closed,

or system fault

Status after system is armed:

LED flashes

slowly : system is armed

Seek the assistance of a workshop in

the event of faults.

Deactivation

Radio remote control: Unlocking the

vehicle by pressing c deactivates the

anti-theft alarm system.

Electronic key system: Unlocking the

vehicle by pressing the button on any

exterior door handle deactivates the

anti-theft alarm system.

The electronic key must be outside

the vehicle, within a range of approx.

1 m of the relevant door side.

The system is not deactivated by

unlocking the driver's door with the

key or with the central locking button

in the passenger compartment.

Alarm

When triggered, the alarm horn

sounds and the hazard warning lights

flash simultaneously. The number

and duration of alarm signals are

stipulated by legislation.

The anti-theft alarm system can be

deactivated by pressing c, by

pressing the switch on the door

handle with electronic key system or

switching on the ignition.

A triggered alarm, which has not been

interrupted by the driver, will be

indicated by the hazard warning

lights. They will flash quickly three

times the next time the vehicle is

unlocked with the radio remote

control. Additionally a warning

message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre after switching on

the ignition.

40 Keys, doors and windows

Vehicle messages 3 122.

If the vehicle's battery is to be

disconnected (e.g. for maintenance

work), the alarm siren must be

deactivated as follows: switch the

ignition on then off, then disconnect

the vehicle's battery within

15 seconds.

Immobiliser

The system is part of the ignition

switch and checks whether the

vehicle is allowed to be started with

the key being used.

The immobiliser is activated

automatically after the key has been

removed from the ignition switch.

If the control indicator d flashes when

the ignition is on, there is a fault in the

system; the engine cannot be started.

Switch off the ignition and repeat the

start attempt.

If the control indicator d continues

flashing, attempt to start the engine

using the spare key and seek the

assistance of a workshop.

Note

Radio Frequency Identification

(RFID) tags may cause interference

with the key. Do not have it placed

near the key when starting the

vehicle.

Note

The immobiliser does not lock the

doors. Always lock the vehicle after

leaving it 3 25.

Switch on the anti-theft alarm

system 3 37.

Control indicator d 3 113.

Exterior mirrors

Convex shape

The shape of the mirror makes

objects appear smaller, which will

affect the ability to estimate

distances.

Side blind spot alert 3 203.

Electric adjustment

Select the relevant exterior mirror by

switching the control to left (L) or right

(R). Then swivel the control to adjust

the mirror.

In position o no mirror is selected.

Keys, doors and windows 41

Folding mirrors

For pedestrian safety, the exterior

mirrors will swing out of their normal

mounting position if they are struck

with sufficient force. Reposition the

mirror by applying slight pressure to

the mirror housing.

Electric folding

Switch control to o, then push the

control c down. Both exterior mirrors

will fold.

Push the control down again - both

exterior mirrors return to their original

position.

If an electrically folded mirror is

manually extended, pressing down

the control will only electrically extend

the other mirror.

Heated mirrors

Operated by pressing Ü.

Heating works with the engine

running and is switched off

automatically after a short time.

42 Keys, doors and windows

Interior mirrors

Manual anti-dazzle

To reduce dazzle, adjust the lever on

the underside of the mirror housing.

Automatic anti-dazzle

Dazzle from following vehicles is

automatically reduced, when driving

in the dark.

Windows

Windscreen

Windscreen stickers

Do not attach stickers such as toll

road stickers or similar on the

windscreen in the area of the interior

mirror. Otherwise the detection zone

of the sensor and the view area of the

camera in the mirror housing could be

restricted.

Windscreen replacement

Caution

If the vehicle has a front-looking

camera sensor for the driver

assistance systems, it is very

important that any windscreen

replacement is performed

accurately according to Opel

specifications. Otherwise, these

systems may not work properly

and there is a risk of unexpected

behaviour and / or messages from

these systems.

Keys, doors and windows 43

Manual windows

The door windows can be opened or

closed with the window cranks.

Power windows

9Warning

Take care when operating the

power windows. Risk of injury,

particularly to children.

If there are children on the rear

seats, switch on the child safety

system for the power windows.

Keep a close watch on the

windows when closing them.

Ensure that nothing becomes

trapped in them as they move.

Switch on ignition to operate power

windows.

Retained power off 3 155.

Operate the switch for the respective

window by pushing to open or pulling

to close.

Pushing or pulling gently to the first

detent: window moves up or down as

long as the switch is operated.

Pushing or pulling firmly to the second

detent then releasing: window moves

up or down automatically with safety

function enabled. To stop movement,

operate the switch once more in the

same direction.

Safety function

If the window glass encounters

resistance above the middle of the

window during automatic closing, it is

immediately stopped and opened

again.

Override safety function

In the event of closing difficulties due

to frost or the like, switch on the

ignition, then pull the switch to the first

detent and hold. The window moves

up without safety function enabled.

To stop movement, release the

switch.

44 Keys, doors and windows

Child safety system for rear

windows

Press z to deactivate rear door

power windows; the LED illuminates.

To activate, press z again.

Operating windows from outside

The windows can be operated

remotely from outside the vehicle.

Press and hold c to open windows.

Press and hold e to close windows.

Release button to stop window

movement.

If the windows are fully opened or

closed, the hazard warning lights will

flash twice.

Overload

If the windows are repeatedly

operated within short intervals, the

window operation is disabled for

some time.

Initialising the power windows

If the windows cannot be closed

automatically (e.g. after

disconnecting the vehicle battery), a

warning message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 122.

Activate the window electronics as

follows:

1. Close doors.

2. Switch on ignition.

3. Pull switch until the window is

closed and keep pulling for

additional two seconds.

4. Push switch until the window is

completely open and keep

pushing for additional

two seconds.

5. Repeat for each window.

Keys, doors and windows 45

Heated rear window

Operated by pressing Ü.

Heating works with the engine

running and is switched off

automatically after a short time.

Heated windscreen

Operated by pressing ,. LED in

button illuminates.

Heating works with the engine

running and is switched off

automatically after a short time.

Pressing , once more during the

same ignition cycle allows the heating

to operate for another three minutes.

Sun visors

The sun visors can be folded down or

swivelled to the side to prevent

dazzling.

The covers of the mirrors should be

closed when driving.

A ticket holder is located on the

backside of the sun visor.

46 Keys, doors and windows

Roof

Sunroof

9Warning

Take care when operating the

sunroof. Risk of injury, particularly

to children.

Keep a close watch on the

movable parts when operating

them. Ensure that nothing

becomes trapped in them as they

move.

Switch on ignition to operate the

sunroof.

Open or close

Press p or r gently to the first

detent: sunroof is opened or closed

as long as the switch is operated.

Press p or r firmly to the second

detent then release: the sunroof is

opened or closed automatically.

During closing the safety function is

enabled. To stop movement, operate

the switch once more.

Raise or close

Press q or r: sunroof is raised or

closed automatically. During closing

the safety function is enabled.

Sunblind

The sunblind is manually operated.

Close or open the sunblind by sliding.

When the sunroof is open, the

sunblind is always open.

General hints

Safety function

If the sunroof encounters resistance

during automatic closing, it is

immediately stopped and opened

again.

Override safety function

In the event of closing difficulties, e.g.

due to frost, hold the switch r

pressed to the second detent. The

sunroof closes with safety function

disabled. To stop movement, release

the switch.

Closing sunroof from outside

The sunroof can be closed remotely

from outside the vehicle.

Keys, doors and windows 47

Press and hold e to close the sunroof.

Release the button to stop the

movement.

Initialising after a power failure

After a power failure, it may only be

possible to operate the sunroof to a

limited extent. Have the system

initialised by your workshop.

48 Seats, restraints

Seats, restraints

Head restraints ............................ 48

Front seats ................................... 49

Seat position .............................. 49

Manual seat adjustment ............ 50

Power seat adjustment .............. 52

Armrest ...................................... 55

Heating ...................................... 56

Ventilating .................................. 56

Massage .................................... 57

Rear seats ................................... 57

Armrest ...................................... 57

Heating ...................................... 58

Seat belts ..................................... 58

Three-point seat belt ................. 59

Airbag system .............................. 60

Front airbag system ................... 64

Side airbag system .................... 64

Curtain airbag system ............... 65

Airbag deactivation .................... 65

Child restraints ............................. 67

Child restraint systems .............. 67

Child restraint installation

locations ................................... 69

Head restraints

Position

9Warning

Only drive with the head restraint

set to the proper position.

The upper edge of the head restraint

should be at upper head level. If this

is not possible for extremely tall

people, set to highest position, and

set to lowest position for small people.

Adjustment

Head restraints on front seats

Height adjustment

Press release button, adjust height,

engage.

Seats, restraints 49

Head restraints on rear seats

Height adjustment

Pull the head restraint upwards or

press the catch to release and push

the head restraint downwards.

Removal of rear head restraints

E.g. for load compartment extension

3 75.

Press both catches, pull the head

restraint upwards and remove.

Front seats

Seat position

9Warning

Only drive with the seat correctly

adjusted.

9Danger

Do not sit closer than 25 cm to the

steering wheel, to permit safe

airbag deployment.

9Warning

Never adjust seats while driving as

they could move uncontrollably.

9Warning

Never store any objects under the

seats.

50 Seats, restraints

● Sit with buttocks as far back

against the backrest as possible.

Adjust the distance between the

seat and the pedals so that legs

are slightly angled when fully

pressing the pedals. Slide the

front passenger seat as far back

as possible.

● Set seat height high enough to

have a clear field of vision on all

sides and of all display

instruments. There should be at

least one hand of clearance

between head and the roof

frame. Your thighs should rest

lightly on the seat without

pressing into it.

● Sit with shoulders as far back

against the backrest as possible.

Set the backrest rake so that it is

possible to easily reach the

steering wheel with arms slightly

bent. Maintain contact between

shoulders and the backrest when

turning the steering wheel. Do

not angle the backrest too far

back. We recommend a

maximum rake of approx. 25°.

● Adjust seat and steering wheel in

a way that the wrist rests on top

of the steering wheel while the

arm is fully extended and

shoulders on the backrest.

● Adjust the steering wheel 3 93.

● Adjust the head restraint 3 48.

● Adjust the thigh support so that

there is a space approx. two

fingers wide between the edge of

the seat and the hollow of the

knee.

● Adjust the lumbar support so that

it supports the natural shape of

the spine.

Manual seat adjustment

Drive only with engaged seats and

backrests.

Longitudinal adjustment

Pull handle, slide seat, release

handle. Try to move the seat back and

forth to ensure that the seat is locked

in place.

Seats, restraints 51

Backrest inclination

Turn handwheel. Do not lean on

backrest when adjusting.

Seat height

Lever pumping motion

up : seat higher

down : seat lower

Seat inclination

Press switch

top : front end higher

bottom : front end lower

52 Seats, restraints

Lumbar support

Adjust lumbar support using the four-

way switch to suit personal

requirements.

Moving support up and down: push

switch up or down.

Increasing and decreasing support:

push switch forwards or backwards.

Adjustable thigh support

Pull the lever and slide the thigh

support.

Power seat adjustment

9Warning

Care must be taken when

operating the power seats. There

is a risk of injury, particularly for

children. Objects could become

trapped.

Keep a close watch on the seats

when adjusting them. Vehicle

passengers should be informed

accordingly.

Longitudinal adjustment

Move switch forwards / backwards.

Seats, restraints 53

Seat height

Move switch upwards / downwards.

Seat inclination

Tilt front of switch upwards /

downwards.

Backrest inclination

Tilt switch forwards / backwards.

Lumbar support

Adjust lumbar support using the

four-way switch to suit personal

requirements.

Moving support up and down: push

switch up or down.

Increasing and decreasing support:

push switch forwards or backwards.

54 Seats, restraints

Adjustable thigh support

Pull the lever and slide the thigh

support.

Side bolster

Adjust seat backrest width to suit

personal requirements.

Press e to reduce backrest width.

Press d to increase backrest width.

Memory function for power seat

adjustment

Two different driver's seat settings

can be stored.

Memorised settings 3 25.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Storing memory position

● Adjust driver's seat to desired

position.

● Press and hold MEM and 1 or 2

simultaneously until a chime

sounds.

Recall of memory positions

Press and hold 1 or 2 until the stored

seat position has been reached.

Releasing the button during seat

movement cancels the recall.

Automatic recall of memory positions

Memory positions are assigned to the

driver (1 or 2) using the respective key

and are automatically recalled when

Seats, restraints 55

the ignition is switched on. In addition,

a message in the Driver Information

Centre indicates the driver number,

identified by the used key. If the

ignition is switched on more than

three subsequent times with the

same key, the message will not be

displayed again until another key is

being used.

To stop recall movement, press one

of the memory or power seat controls.

Precondition is that Personalisation

by Driver and Auto Memory Recall is

activated in the personal settings of

the Info Display.

This function can be activated or

deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation.

Select the relevant setting in the

Vehicle menu in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 121.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Easy exit function

For a convenient exit out of the

vehicle, the power driver seat moves

rearwards when vehicle is stationary.

To activate the easy exit function:

● set selector lever to position P

(automatic transmission)

● apply parking brake (manual

transmission)

● switch off ignition

● remove key from the ignition

switch

● open the driver's door

If the door is already open, switch off

ignition to activate easy exit.

To stop movement, press one of the

memory or power seat controls.

This function can be activated or

deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation.

Select the relevant setting in the

Vehicle menu in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 121.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Safety function

If the driver's seat encounters

resistance during movement, the

recall may stop. After removing the

obstruction, press and hold the

appropriate memory position button

for two seconds. Try recalling the

memory position again. If the recall

does not operate, consult a

workshop.

Overload

If the seat setting is electrically

overloaded, the power supply is

automatically cut-off for a short time.

Note

After an accident in which airbags

have been deployed, the memory

function for each position button will

be deactivated.

Armrest

56 Seats, restraints

The armrest can be slid forwards by

10 cm. Under the armrest there is a

storage compartment.

Armrest storage 3 74.

Heating

Adjust heating to the desired setting

by pressing ß for the respective seat

one or more times. The control

indicator in the button indicates the

setting.

Prolonged use of the highest setting

for people with sensitive skin is not

recommended.

The seat heating will be reduced

automatically from highest level to

medium level after 30 minutes.

Seat heating is operational when

engine is running and during an

Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 157.

Automatic seat heating

Depending on the equipment, the

automatic seat heating can be

enabled in the vehicle personalisation

menu in the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

When enabled, the heating of the

seats will be activated automatically

at vehicle start. The activation is

based on several parameters such as

vehicle interior temperature, intensity

and direction of the sun and

temperature setting of the electronic

climate control system for the driver

and passenger side.

As the vehicle’s interior warms up, the

seat heating level will be reduced

automatically until it finally goes off.

The seat heating level being provided

during the automatic operation is

shown by heated seat indicator lights.

If the passenger seat is unoccupied,

the automatic seat heating feature will

not activate the seat heating for that

seat.

The seat heating buttons can be

pressed at any time to exit the

automatic seat heating for the

respective seat and control the seat

heating manually instead.

Ventilating

Seats, restraints 57

Adjust ventilating to the desired

setting by pressing A for the

respective seat one or more times.

The control indicator in the button

indicates the setting.

Ventilated seats are operational when

engine is running and during an

Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 157.

Massage

Press c to switch on the back

massage function.

To switch off, press c again.

After 10 minutes the massage

function is switched off automatically. Rear seats

Armrest

Fold armrest down.

58 Seats, restraints

Heating

Activate seat heating by pressing ß

for the respective rear outer seat.

Activation is indicated by the LED in

the button.

Press ß once more to deactivate seat

heating.

Prolonged use for people with

sensitive skin is not recommended.

Seat heating is operational when

engine is running and during an

Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 157.

Seat belts

The seat belts are locked during

heavy acceleration or deceleration of

the vehicle, holding the occupants in

the seat position. Thereby the risk of

injury is considerably reduced.

9Warning

Fasten seat belt before each trip.

In the event of an accident, people

not wearing seat belts endanger

their fellow occupants and

themselves.

Seat belts are designed to be used by

only one person at a time.

Child restraint system 3 67.

Periodically check all parts of the belt

system for damage, soiling and

proper functionality.

Have damaged components replaced

by a workshop. After an accident,

have the belts and triggered belt

pretensioners replaced by a

workshop.

Note

Make sure that the belts are not

damaged by shoes or sharp-edged

objects or trapped. Prevent dirt from

getting into the belt retractors.

Seat belt reminder

Indicates seat belt status for front

seats by control indicators X and k,

or for rear seats by the symbol X in

the Driver Information Centre 3 108.

Belt force limiters

Stress on the body is reduced by the

gradual release of the belt during a

collision.

Seats, restraints 59

Belt pretensioners

In the event of a head-on, rear-end or

side-on collision of a certain severity,

the front and rear outer seat belts are

tightened.

9Warning

Incorrect handling (e.g. removal or

fitting of belts) can trigger the belt

pretensioners.

Deployment of the belt pretensioners

is indicated by continuous illumination

of control indicator v 3 109.

Triggered belt pretensioners must be

replaced by a workshop. Belt

pretensioners can only be triggered

once.

Note

Do not affix or install accessories or

other objects that may interfere with

the operation of the belt tensioner.

Do not make any modification to belt

tensioner components as this will

invalidate the vehicle operating

permit.

Three-point seat belt

Fasten

Withdraw the belt from the retractor,

guide it untwisted across the body

and insert the latch plate into the

buckle. Tighten the lap belt regularly

whilst driving by pulling the shoulder

belt.

Loose or bulky clothing prevents the

belt from fitting snugly. Do not place

objects such as handbags or mobile

phones between the belt and your

body.

9Warning

The belt must not rest against hard

or fragile objects in the pockets of

your clothing.

Seat belt reminder X, k 3 108.

60 Seats, restraints

Unfasten

To release belt, press red button on

belt buckle.

Using the seat belt while pregnant

9Warning

The lap belt must be positioned as

low as possible across the pelvis

to prevent pressure on the

abdomen.

Airbag system

The airbag system consists of a

number of individual systems

depending on the scope of

equipment.

When triggered, the airbags inflate

within milliseconds. They also deflate

so quickly that it is often unnoticeable

during the collision.

9Warning

The airbag system deploys in an

explosive manner, repairs must be

performed by skilled personnel

only.

9Warning

Adding accessories that change

the vehicle's frame, bumper

system, height, front end or side

sheet metal, may keep the airbag

system from working properly. The

operation of the airbag system can

also be affected by changing any

parts of the front seats, seat belts,

Seats, restraints 61

airbag sensing and diagnostic

module, steering wheel,

instrument panel, inner door seals

including the speakers, any of the

airbag modules, ceiling or pillar

trim, front sensors, side impact

sensors or airbag wiring.

Note

The airbag systems and belt

pretensioner control electronics are

located in the centre console area.

Do not put any magnetic objects in

this area.

Do not affix any objects onto the

airbag covers and do not cover them

with other materials. Have damaged

covers replaced by a workshop.

Each airbag is triggered only once.

Have deployed airbags replaced by

a workshop. Furthermore, it may be

necessary to have the steering

wheel, the instrument panel, parts of

the panelling, the door seals,

handles and the seats replaced.

Do not make any modifications to

the airbag system as this will

invalidate the vehicle operating

permit.

Control indicator v for airbag systems

3 109.

Child restraint systems on front

passenger seat with airbag

systems

Warning according to ECE R94.02:

EN: NEVER use a rearward-facing

child restraint on a seat protected by

an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it;

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the

CHILD can occur.

DE: Nach hinten gerichtete

Kindersitze NIEMALS auf einem Sitz

verwenden, der durch einen davor

befindlichen AKTIVEN AIRBAG

geschützt ist, da dies den TOD oder

SCHWERE VERLETZUNGEN DES

KINDES zur Folge haben kann.

FR: NE JAMAIS utiliser un siège

d'enfant orienté vers l'arrière sur un

siège protégé par un COUSSIN

GONFLABLE ACTIF placé devant lui,

sous peine d'infliger des

BLESSURES GRAVES, voire

MORTELLES à l'ENFANT.

ES: NUNCA utilice un sistema de

retención infantil orientado hacia

atrás en un asiento protegido por un

AIRBAG FRONTAL ACTIVO. Peligro

de MUERTE o LESIONES GRAVES

para el NIÑO.

RU: ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ

устанавливать детское

удерживающее устройство лицом

назад на сиденье автомобиля,

оборудованном фронтальной

подушкой безопасности, если

ПОДУШКА НЕ ОТКЛЮЧЕНА! Это

может привести к СМЕРТИ или

СЕРЬЕЗНЫМ ТРАВМАМ

РЕБЕНКА.

62 Seats, restraints

NL: Gebruik NOOIT een achterwaarts

gericht kinderzitje op een stoel met

een ACTIEVE AIRBAG ervoor, om

DODELIJK of ERNSTIG LETSEL van

het KIND te voorkomen.

DA: Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt

autostol på et forsæde med AKTIV

AIRBAG, BARNET kan komme i

LIVSFARE eller komme ALVORLIGT

TIL SKADE.

SV: Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvänd

barnstol på ett säte som skyddas med

en framförvarande AKTIV AIRBAG.

DÖDSFALL eller ALLVARLIGA

SKADOR kan drabba BARNET.

FI: ÄLÄ KOSKAAN sijoita taaksepäin

suunnattua lasten turvaistuinta

istuimelle, jonka edessä on

AKTIIVINEN TURVATYYNY, LAPSI

VOI KUOLLA tai VAMMAUTUA

VAKAVASTI.

NO: Bakovervendt

barnesikringsutstyr må ALDRI brukes

på et sete med AKTIV

KOLLISJONSPUTE foran, da det kan

føre til at BARNET utsettes for

LIVSFARE og fare for ALVORLIGE

SKADER.

PT: NUNCA use um sistema de

retenção para crianças voltado para

trás num banco protegido com um

AIRBAG ACTIVO na frente do

mesmo, poderá ocorrer a PERDA DE

VIDA ou FERIMENTOS GRAVES na

CRIANÇA.

IT: Non usare mai un sistema di

sicurezza per bambini rivolto

all'indietro su un sedile protetto da

AIRBAG ATTIVO di fronte ad esso:

pericolo di MORTE o LESIONI

GRAVI per il BAMBINO!

EL: ΠΟΤΕ μη χρησιμοποιείτε παιδικό

κάθισμα ασφαλείας με φορά προς τα

πίσω σε κάθισμα που προστατεύεται

από μετωπικό ΕΝΕΡΓΟ ΑΕΡΟΣΑΚΟ,

διότι το παιδί μπορεί να υποστεί

ΘΑΝΑΣΙΜΟ ή ΣΟΒΑΡΟ

ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ.

PL: NIE WOLNO montować fotelika

dziecięcego zwróconego tyłem do

kierunku jazdy na fotelu, przed

którym znajduje się WŁĄCZONA

PODUSZKA POWIETRZNA.

Niezastosowanie się do tego

zalecenia może być przyczyną

ŚMIERCI lub POWAŻNYCH

OBRAŻEŃ u DZIECKA.

TR: Arkaya bakan bir çocuk emniyet

sistemini KESİNLİKLE önünde bir

AKTİF HAVA YASTIĞI ile

korunmakta olan bir koltukta

kullanmayınız. ÇOCUK ÖLEBİLİR

veya AĞIR ŞEKİLDE

YARALANABİLİR.

UK: НІКОЛИ не використовуйте

систему безпеки для дітей, що

встановлюється обличчям назад,

на сидінні з УВІМКНЕНОЮ

ПОДУШКОЮ БЕЗПЕКИ, інакше це

може призвести до СМЕРТІ чи

СЕРЙОЗНОГО ТРАВМУВАННЯ

ДИТИНИ.

HU: SOHA ne használjon hátrafelé

néző biztonsági gyerekülést előlről

AKTÍV LÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen,

mert a GYERMEK HALÁLÁT vagy

KOMOLY SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.

HR: NIKADA nemojte koristiti sustav

zadržavanja za djecu okrenut prema

natrag na sjedalu s AKTIVNIM

ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega,

to bi moglo dovesti do SMRTI ili

OZBILJNJIH OZLJEDA za DIJETE.

SL: NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega

varnostnega sedeža, obrnjenega v

nasprotni smeri vožnje, na sedež z

Seats, restraints 63

AKTIVNO ČELNO ZRAČNO

BLAZINO, saj pri tem obstaja

nevarnost RESNIH ali SMRTNIH

POŠKODB za OTROKA.

SR: NIKADA ne koristiti bezbednosni

sistem za decu u kome su deca

okrenuta unazad na sedištu sa

AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM

JASTUKOM ispred sedišta zato što

DETE može da NASTRADA ili da se

TEŠKO POVREDI.

MK: НИКОГАШ не користете детско

седиште свртено наназад на

седиште заштитено со АКТИВНО

ВОЗДУШНО ПЕРНИЧЕ пред него,

затоа што детето може ДА ЗАГИНЕ

или да биде ТЕШКО ПОВРЕДЕНО.

BG: НИКОГА не използвайте

детска седалка, гледаща назад,

върху седалка, която е защитена

чрез АКТИВНА ВЪЗДУШНА

ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА пред нея - може да

се стигне до СМЪРТ или

СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на

ДЕТЕТО.

RO: Nu utilizaţi NICIODATĂ un scaun

pentru copil îndreptat spre partea din

spate a maşinii pe un scaun protejat

de un AIRBAG ACTIV în faţa sa;

acest lucru poate duce la DECESUL

sau VĂTĂMAREA GRAVĂ a

COPILULUI.

CS: NIKDY nepoužívejte dětský

zádržný systém instalovaný proti

směru jízdy na sedadle, které je

chráněno před sedadlem AKTIVNÍM

AIRBAGEM. Mohlo by dojít k

VÁŽNÉMU PORANĚNÍ nebo ÚMRTÍ

DÍTĚTE.

SK: NIKDY nepoužívajte detskú

sedačku otočenú vzad na sedadle

chránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM,

pretože môže dôjsť k SMRTI alebo

VÁŽNYM ZRANENIAM DIEŤAŤA.

LT: JOKIU BŪDU nemontuokite atgal

atgręžtos vaiko tvirtinimo sistemos

sėdynėje, prieš kurią įrengta AKTYVI

ORO PAGALVĖ, nes VAIKAS GALI

ŽŪTI arba RIMTAI SUSIŽALOTI.

LV: NEKĀDĀ GADĪJUMĀ

neizmantojiet uz aizmuguri vērstu

bērnu sēdeklīti sēdvietā, kas tiek

aizsargāta ar tās priekšā uzstādītu

AKTĪVU DROŠĪBAS SPILVENU, jo

pretējā gadījumā BĒRNS var gūt

SMAGAS TRAUMAS vai IET BOJĀ.

ET: ÄRGE kasutage tahapoole

suunatud lapseturvaistet istmel, mille

ees on AKTIIVSE TURVAPADJAGA

kaitstud iste, sest see võib

põhjustada LAPSE SURMA või

TÕSISE VIGASTUSE.

MT: QATT tuża trażżin għat-tfal li

jħares lejn in-naħa ta’ wara fuq sit

protett b’AIRBAG ATTIV quddiemu;

dan jista’ jikkawża l-MEWT jew

ĠRIEĦI SERJI lit-TFAL.

GA: Ná húsáid srian sábháilteachta

linbh cúil RIAMH ar shuíochán a

bhfuil mála aeir ag feidhmiú os a

chomhair. Tá baol BÁIS nó GORTÚ

DONA don PHÁISTE ag baint leis.

Beyond the warning required by

ECE R94.02, for safety reasons a

forward-facing child restraint system

must only be used subject to the

instructions and restrictions in the

table 3 69.

The airbag label is located on both

sides of the front passenger sun visor.

Airbag deactivation 3 65.

64 Seats, restraints

Front airbag system

The front airbag system consists of

one airbag in the steering wheel and

one in the instrument panel on the

front passenger side. These can be

identified by the word AIRBAG.

The front airbag system is triggered in

the event of a front-end impact of a

certain severity. The ignition must be

switched on.

The inflated airbags cushion the

impact, thereby reducing the risk of

injury to the upper body and head of

the front seat occupants

considerably.

9Warning

Optimum protection is only

provided when the seat is in the

proper position.

Seat position 3 49.

Keep the area in which the airbag

inflates clear of obstructions.

Fit the seat belt correctly and

engage securely. Only then is the

airbag able to protect.

Side airbag system

The side airbag system consists of an

airbag in each front seat backrest.

This can be identified by the word

AIRBAG.

The side airbag system is triggered in

the event of a side impact of a certain

severity. The ignition must be

switched on.

The inflated airbags cushion the

impact, thereby reducing the risk of

injury to the upper body and pelvis in

the event of a side-on collision

considerably.

Seats, restraints 65

9Warning

Keep the area in which the airbag

inflates clear of obstructions.

Note

Only use protective seat covers that

have been approved for the vehicle.

Be careful not to cover the airbags.

Curtain airbag system

The curtain airbag system consists of

an airbag in the roof frame on each

side. This can be identified by the

word AIRBAG on the roof pillars.

The curtain airbag system is triggered

in the event of a side-on impact of a

certain severity. The ignition must be

switched on.

The inflated airbags cushion the

impact, thereby reducing the risk of

injury to the head in the event of a

side-on impact considerably.

9Warning

Keep the area in which the airbag

inflates clear of obstructions.

The hooks on the handles in the

roof frame are only suitable for

hanging up light articles of

clothing, without coat hangers. Do

not keep any items in these

clothes.

Airbag deactivation

The front passenger airbag system

must be deactivated for child restraint

system on the passenger seat

according to the instructions in the

table 3 69. The side airbag and

curtain airbag systems, the belt

pretensioners and all driver airbag

systems will remain active.

The front passenger airbag system

can be deactivated via a key-

operated switch on the passenger

side of the instrument panel.

66 Seats, restraints

Use the ignition key to choose the

position:

*OFF : front passenger airbag is

deactivated and will not

inflate in the event of a

collision. Control indicator

*OFF illuminates

continuously in the

overhead console.

VON : front passenger airbag is

active

9Danger

Deactivate passenger airbag only

in combination with the use of a

child restraint system, subject to

the instructions and restrictions in

the table 3 69.

Otherwise, there is a risk of fatal

injury for a person occupying a

seat with a deactivated front

passenger airbag.

If the control indicator V illuminates

for approx. 60 seconds after the

ignition is switched on, the front

passenger airbag system will inflate

in the event of a collision.

If the control indicator * illuminates

after the ignition is switched on, the

front passenger airbag system is

deactivated. It stays on while the

airbag is deactivated.

If both control indicators are

illuminated at the same time, there is

a system failure. The status of the

system is not discernible, therefore

no person is allowed to occupy the

front passenger seat. Contact a

workshop immediately.

Consult a workshop immediately if

neither of the two control indicators

are illuminated.

Change status only when the vehicle

is stopped with the ignition off.

Status remains until the next change.

Control indicator for airbag

deactivation 3 109.

Seats, restraints 67

Child restraints

Child restraint systems

9Danger

If using a rear-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger

seat, the airbag system for the

front passenger seat must be

deactivated. This also applies to

certain forward-facing child

restraint systems as indicated in

the tables 3 69.

Airbag deactivation 3 65.

Airbag label 3 60.

We recommend a child restraint

system which is tailored specifically to

the vehicle. For further information,

contact your workshop.

When a child restraint system is being

used, pay attention to the following

usage and installation instructions as

well as to those supplied with the child

restraint system.

Always comply with local or national

regulations. In some countries, the

use of child restraint systems is

forbidden on certain seats.

Child restraint systems can be

fastened with:

● Three-point seat belt

● ISOFIX brackets

● Top-tether anchor

Three-point seat belt

Child restraint systems can be

fastened by using a three-point seat

belt. Depending on the size of the

used child restraint systems, up to

three child restraint systems can be

attached to the rear seats. After

fastening the child restraint system

the seat belt has to be tightened

3 69.

ISOFIX brackets

Fasten vehicle-approved ISOFIX

child restraint systems to the ISOFIX

brackets. Specific vehicle ISOFIX

child restraint system positions are

marked in the ISOFIX table 3 69.

ISOFIX brackets are indicated by a

label on the backrest.

An i-size child restraint system is an

universal ISOFIX child restraint

system according UN Regulation

No. 129.

All i-size child restraint systems can

be used on any vehicle seat suitable

for i-size, i-size table 3 69.

68 Seats, restraints

Either a Top-tether strap or a support

leg must be used in addition to the

ISOFIX brackets.

i-size child seats and vehicle seats

with i-size approval are marked with

i-size symbol, see illustration.

Top-tether anchors

Top-tether anchors are marked with

the symbol : for a child seat.

In addition to the ISOFIX brackets,

fasten the Top-tether strap to the

Top-tether anchors.

ISOFIX child restraint systems of

universal category positions are

marked in the table by IUF 3 69.

Selecting the right system

The rear seats are the most

convenient location to fasten a child

restraint system.

Children should travel facing

rearwards in the vehicle as long as

possible. This makes sure that the

child's backbone, which is still very

weak, is under less strain in the event

of an accident.

Suitable are restraint systems that

comply with valid UN ECE

regulations. Check local laws and

regulations for mandatory use of child

restraint systems.

The following child restraints are

recommended for the following

weight classes:

Maxi Cosi Cabriofix for children up to

13 kg for group 0, group 0+ and Duo

Plus for children from 13 kg to 18 kg

in group I.

Ensure that the child restraint system

to be installed is compatible with the

vehicle type.

Ensure that the mounting location of

the child restraint system within the

vehicle is correct, see following

tables.

Allow children to enter and exit the

vehicle only on the side facing away

from the traffic.

When the child restraint system is not

in use, secure the seat with a seat belt

or remove it from the vehicle.

Note

Do not affix anything on the child

restraint systems and do not cover

them with any other materials.

A child restraint system which has

been subjected to stress in an

accident must be replaced.

Seats, restraints 69

Child restraint installation locations

Permissible options for fastening a child restraint system with a three-point seat belt

Weight class

On front passenger seat

On rear outboard seats On rear centre seatactivated airbag deactivated airbag

Group 0: up to 10 kg XU1,2 U/L3U

Group 0+: up to 13 kg XU1,2 U/L3U

Group I: 9 to 18 kg XU1,2 U/L3,4 U4

Group II: 15 to 25 kg U1,2 XU/L3,4 U4

Group III: 22 to 36 kg U1,2 XU/L3,4 U4

U : universal suitability in conjunction with three-point seat belt

L : suitable for particular child restraint systems of the 'specific-vehicle', 'restricted' or 'semi-universal' categories. The

child restraint system must be approved for the specific vehicle type (refer to the vehicle type list of the child restraint

system)

X : no child restraint system permitted in this weight class

1: move seat forwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure

that the belt runs forwards from the upper anchorage point

2: move seat upwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure

that the belt is tight on the buckle side

3: move the respective front seat ahead of the child restraint system forwards as far as necessary

4: adjust the respective headrest as necessary or remove if required

70 Seats, restraints

Permissible options for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX brackets

Weight class Size class Fixture

On front passenger seat On rear outboard

seats On rear centre

seatactivated airbag deactivated airbag

Group 0: up to 10 kg G ISO/L2 X X X X

F ISO/L1 X X X X

E ISO/R1 X X IL3X

Group 0+: up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL3X

D ISO/R2 X X IL3X

C ISO/R3 X X IL3X

Group I: 9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X X IL3,4 X

C ISO/R3 X X IL3,4 X

B ISO/F2 X X IL, IUF3,4 X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IL, IUF3,4 X

A ISO/F3 X X IL, IUF3,4 X

Group II: 15 to 25 kg X X IL3,4 X

Group III: 22 to 36 kg X X IL3,4 X

Seats, restraints 71

IL : suitable for particular ISOFIX restraint systems of the 'specific-vehicle', 'restricted' or 'semi-universal' categories.

The ISOFIX restraint system must be approved for the specific vehicle type (refer to the vehicle type list of the child

restraint system)

IUF : suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this weight class

X : no ISOFIX child restraint system approved in this weight class

1: move seat forwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest inclination as far as necessary to a vertical position

to ensure that the belt runs forwards from the upper anchorage point

2: move seat height adjustment upwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest inclination as far as necessary

to a vertical position to ensure that the belt is tight on the buckle side

3: move the respective front seat ahead of the child restraint system forwards as far as necessary

4: adjust the respective headrest as necessary or remove if required

ISOFIX size class and seat device

A – ISO/F3 : forward-facing child restraint system for children of maximum size in the weight class 9 to 18 kg

B – ISO/F2 : forward-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class 9 to 18 kg

B1 – ISO/F2X : forward-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class 9 to 18 kg

C – ISO/R3 : rear-facing child restraint system for children of maximum size in the weight class up to 18 kg

D – ISO/R2 : rear-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class up to 18 kg

E – ISO/R1 : rear-facing child restraint system for young children in the weight class up to 13 kg

F– ISO/L1 : left lateral facing position child restraint system (carry-cot)

G – ISO/L2 : right lateral facing position child restraint system (carry-cot)

Permissible options for fitting an i-size child restraint system with ISOFIX brackets

On front passenger seat

On rear outboard seats On rear centre seatactivated airbag deactivated airbag

i-size child restraint systems X X i - U X

72 Seats, restraints

i - U : suitable for i-size 'universal' forward and rearward facing child restraint systems

X : seating position not suitable for i-size 'universal' child restraint systems

Storage 73

Storage

Storage compartments ................ 73

Glovebox ................................... 73

Cupholders ................................ 73

Front storage ............................. 74

Armrest storage ......................... 74

Load compartment ....................... 75

Load compartment cover ........... 81

Rear floor storage cover ............ 82

Lashing eyes ............................. 83

Cargo management system ...... 84

Safety net .................................. 86

Warning triangle ........................ 88

First aid kit ................................. 88

Roof rack system ......................... 89

Roof rack ................................... 89

Loading information ..................... 90

Storage compartments

9Warning

Do not store heavy or sharp

objects in the storage

compartments. Otherwise, the

storage compartment lid could

open and vehicle occupants could

be injured by objects being thrown

around in the event of hard

braking, a sudden change in

direction or an accident.

Glovebox

The glovebox features a pen holder,

a coin holder and an adapter for the

locking wheel nuts.

The glovebox should be closed whilst

driving.

Cupholders

Cupholders are located in the centre

console.

Illustrations show different versions.

74 Storage

Depending on the version,

cupholders are located under a cover

in the centre console. Slide cover

backwards.

Front storage

A storage compartment is located

next to the steering wheel.

A combined storage and mobile

device compartment is located in the

instrument panel center stack.

Armrest storage

Storage under the front armrest

Press button to fold up the armrest.

The armrest must be in rearmost

position.

Storage 75

Load compartment

Depending on the equipment, the

rear seat backrest is divided into two

or three parts. All parts can be folded

down.

Before folding rear seat backrests,

execute the following if necessary:

● 5-door hatchback: remove the

load compartment cover 3 81.

● Sports Tourer: remove roller

blind 3 81.

● Press and hold the catch to push

the head restraints down 3 48.

● Remove the rear head restraints

to have the backrests fully rest on

the seat cushions 3 48.

Load compartment extension

(two-part rear seat backrest), 5-

door Hatchback

● Guide the seat belts of the outer

seats through side supports to

protect them against damage.

When folding the backrests, pull

the seat belts along with them.

● Pull the lever on one or both outer

sides and fold down the

backrests onto the seat cushion.

● Take the seat belt out of the seat

backrest guide and put it behind

the retainer as shown in the

illustration.

● To fold up, raise the backrests

and guide them into an upright

position until they engage

audibly.

76 Storage

The backrests are properly

engaged when the red mark near

the lever is no longer visible.

9Warning

When folding up, ensure that

backrests are securely locked in

position before driving. Failure to

do so may result in personal injury

or damage to the load or vehicle in

the event of hard braking or a

collision.

The seat belt of the centre seat could

be blocked when the backrest is

folded up too quickly. To unlock the

retractor, push in the seat belt or pull

it out by approx. 20 mm then release.

Load compartment extension

(three-part rear seat backrest), 5-

door Hatchback

● Fold up the rear armrest.

● Pull the loop and fold down the

backrest of the centre seat.

● Pull the lever on one or both outer

sides and fold down the

backrests onto the seat cushion.

9Warning

Take care when folding down the

right outer seat backrest if the

centre seat backrest is already

folded down. Risk of injury due to

bolt protruding from the inner side

of the backrest.

Storage 77

● Guide the seat belts of the outer

seats through side supports to

protect them against damage.

When folding the backrests, pull

the seat belts along with them.

● Take the seat belt out of the seat

backrest guide and put it behind

the retainer as shown in the

illustration.

● To fold up, raise the backrests

and guide them into an upright

position until they engage

audibly.

The backrests are properly

engaged when the red mark on

both sides near the lever are no

longer visible.

9Warning

When folding up, ensure that

backrests are securely locked in

position before driving. Failure to

do so may result in personal injury

or damage to the load or vehicle in

the event of hard braking or a

collision.

The seat belt of the centre seat could

be blocked when the backrest is

folded up too quickly. To unlock the

retractor, push in the seat belt or pull

it out by approx. 20 mm then release.

78 Storage

Load compartment extension

(two-part rear seat backrest),

Sports Tourer

● Insert latch plates of the outer

seat belts into side holder to

protect the belts against damage,

see illustration.

● Pull the lever on one or both outer

sides and fold down the

backrests onto the seat cushion.

● To fold up, raise the backrests

and guide them into an upright

position until they engage

audibly.

The backrests are properly

engaged when the red mark on

both sides near the lever are no

longer visible.

9Warning

When folding up, ensure that

backrests are securely locked in

position before driving. Failure to

do so may result in personal injury

or damage to the load or vehicle in

the event of hard braking or a

collision.

Storage 79

The seat belt of the centre seat could

be blocked when the backrest is

folded up too quickly. To unlock the

retractor, push in the seat belt or pull

it out by approx. 20 mm then release.

Load compartment extension

(three-part rear seat backrest),

Sports Tourer

● Fold up the rear centre armrest.

● Pull the loop and fold down the

backrest of the centre seat.

● Insert latch plates of the outer

seat belts into side holder to

protect the belts against damage,

see illustration.

● Pull the lever on one or both outer

sides and fold down the

backrests onto the seat cushion.

9Warning

Take care when folding down the

right outer seat backrest if the

centre seat backrest is already

folded down. Risk of injury due to

bolt protruding from the inner side

of the backrest.

80 Storage

● Alternatively fold seat backrests

from the load compartment: pull

switch on left or right sidewall of

the load compartment to fold the

corresponding part of the rear

seat backrest.

9Warning

Take care when operating the rear

backrests from the load

compartment. The backrest is

folded with considerable power.

Risk of injury, particularly to

children.

Ensure that nothing is attached to

the rear seats or located on the

seat cushion.

● To fold up, raise the backrests

and guide them into an upright

position until they engage

audibly.

The backrests are properly

engaged when the red mark on

the levers on both sides are no

longer visible.

9Warning

When folding up, ensure that

backrests are securely locked in

position before driving. Failure to

do so may result in personal injury

or damage to the load or vehicle in

the event of hard braking or a

collision.

The seat belt of the centre seat could

be blocked when the backrest is

folded up too quickly. To unlock the

retractor, push in the seat belt or pull

it out by approx. 20 mm then release.

Storage 81

Load compartment cover

Do not place any objects on the cover.

5-door hatchback

Removing cover

Unhook retaining straps from tailgate.

Lift cover at the rear.

Remove the cover.

Fitting cover

Engage cover in side guides and fold

downwards. Attach retaining straps to

tailgate.

Sports Tourer

Closing roller blind

Pull the roller blind using the handle

towards the rear and upwards until it

engages in the sideward retainers.

Opening roller blind

Pull the roller blind handle to the rear

and downwards. It rolls up

automatically.

82 Storage

Removing roller blind

Open the roller blind.

Pull the lever on the right side up and

hold it. Lift the roller blind first on the

right side and remove from retainers.

All engine versions, except CNG: The

removed roller blind can be stored

under the rear floor cover as shown in

the illustration. Insert the left side of

the rolled up cover first in the front

right recess, pull the lever up and

insert the right side in the front left

recess.

Rear floor storage cover 3 82.

Installing roller blind

Insert the left side of the roller blind in

recess, then pull lever up.

Hold and insert the right side of the

roller blind in recess and engage.

Rear floor storage cover

Rear floor cover

5-door Hatchback

The rear floor cover can be removed.

Raise cover at the rear and slightly

rotate at one side before removing.

Storage 83

Sports Tourer

Pull the handle and fold the rear part

of the cover forward.

Set up the folded cover upright behind

the rear seat backrests.

Lashing eyes

The lashing eyes are designed to

secure items against slippage, e.g.

using lashing straps or luggage net.

5-door Hatchback

First remove the rear floor storage

cover to get access to the lashing

eyes.

On vehicles equipped with a spare

wheel, the front lashing eyes are

located at the sidewalls.

On vehicles equipped with tyre repair

kit, the front lashing eyes are located

underneath the rear floor cover

behind the rear seats. To get access

to the lashing eyes, open the

perforated parts of the cover by using

the screwdriver.

Vehicle tools 3 247.

Stick the screwdriver through the

cover as shown in the illustration and

fold up the perforated part of the

cover.

Fold up the lashing eyes by using the

screwdriver.

84 Storage

Sports Tourer

Front and rear lashing eyes are

located at the sidewalls. Fold up the

lashing eyes to use and fold down

when not required.

Cargo management system

The FlexOrganizer is a flexible

system for dividing up the load

compartment.

The system consists of:

● adapters

● mesh pockets

● hooks

● service box

● strap set

The components are fitted in rails on

both side panels using adapters and

hooks.

Installation of adapters in the rails

Fold open the handle plate, insert the

adapter into the upper and lower

groove of the rail and move to the

required position. Turn the handle

plate upwards to lock the adapter. To

remove, turn the handle plate down

and move out of the rail.

Variable partition net

Insert adapters into the required

position in the rails. Stick together the

halves of the net rods.

To install, push rods together a little

and insert into the relevant openings

in the adapters.

To remove, press the net rods

together and remove from the

adapters.

Storage 85

Net pocket

Insert adapters into the required

position in the rails. The net pocket

can be suspended from the adapters.

Installation of hooks in the rails

Insert the hook in the desired position

first in the upper groove of the rail and

then press in the lower groove. To

remove, first pull out of the upper

groove.

Service box

Install two hooks in the upper rail.

Insert the upper brackets of the box

from above into the hooks.

86 Storage

Alternatively install both hooks in the

lower rail. Plug in the lower brackets

of the box from above into the lower

hooks.

Strap set

Insert the adapters of the strap set in

a rail. Make sure that the belt is not

twisted.

The strap set has two locks to open.

The belt can be tightened.

Safety net

The safety net is available on the

Sports Tourer and can be installed

behind the rear seats or, if the rear

seat backrests are folded, behind the

front seats.

Passengers must not be transported

behind the safety net.

Installation

Behind the rear seats

● There are installation openings

on both sides in the roof frame

above the rear seats: suspend

and engage rod of net at one

side, compress rod and suspend

and engage at the other side.

● Attach the hooks of safety net

straps in loops underneath the

rear floor cover behind the rear

seats. To get access to the loops,

open the perforated parts in the

floor cover on both sides by using

the screwdriver and fold up the

loops. Attach the hooks to the

loops.

● Tension both straps by pulling at

the loose end.

● Rear seat backrests must be

raised up.

Storage 87

Behind the front seats

● There are installation openings

on both sides in the roof frame

above the front seats: suspend

and engage rod of net at one

side, compress rod and suspend

and engage at the other side.

● Attach hooks of safety net straps

to loops in the floor in front of the

rear seats. To get access to the

loops, push in the perforated

parts in the floor cover on both

sides. Attach the hooks to the

loops.

● Tension both straps by pulling at

the loose end.

● Push down head restraints and

fold down rear seat backrests

3 75.

Removal

Pull the flap at the tightener on both

sides to release the straps. Detach

hooks from the eyes.

Unhook the safety net rods from the

brackets in the roof frame.

Roll up the net and secure with a

strap.

Stowing

All engine versions, except CNG: The

removed safety net can be stored

under the rear floor cover 3 82.

88 Storage

Warning triangle

5-door hatchback

Stow the warning triangle in the

recess at the rear of the load

compartment.

Sports Tourer

Stow the warning triangle in the

recess under the rear floor cover on

the right or left side.

First aid kit

Stow the first aid kit in the

compartment in the left side wall.

Illustration shows 5-door Hatchback.

To open the compartment, disengage

cover and open.

Illustration shows Sports Tourer.

Storage 89

To open the cover turn knob. Roof rack system

Roof rack

For safety reasons and to avoid

damage to the roof, the vehicle

approved roof rack system is

recommended. For further

information contact your workshop.

Mounting roof rack

5-door Hatchback, Sports Tourer

Open all doors.

Mounting points are located in each

door frame of the vehicle body.

Fasten the roof rack according to the

installation instructions delivered with

the roof rack.

Remove the roof rack when not in

use.

9Warning

Sports Tourer

Roof railings are a styling element

only and not designed to carry any

load. Installation of roof racks or

other accessory is not permitted.

Use the designated mounting

points in the door frames

exclusively.

90 Storage

Loading information

● Heavy objects in the load

compartment should be placed

against the seat backrests. Make

sure that the backrests are

securely engaged, i.e. no longer

showing the red markings behind

the release levers. If objects can

be stacked, heavier objects

should be placed at the bottom.

● Prevent sliding of loose objects

by securing them with straps

attached to the lashing eyes

3 83.

● Do not allow the load to protrude

above the upper edge of the

backrests.

● Sports Tourer: install safety net

when transporting objects in the

load compartment.

● Do not place any objects on the

load compartment cover or the

instrument panel, and do not

cover the sensor on top of the

instrument panel.

● The load must not obstruct the

operation of the pedals, parking

brake and gear selector lever, or

hinder the freedom of movement

of the driver. Do not place any

unsecured objects in the interior.

● Do not drive with an open load

compartment.

9Warning

Always make sure that the load in

the vehicle is securely stowed.

Otherwise objects can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and

cause personal injury or damage

to the load or car.

● The payload is the difference

between the permitted gross

vehicle weight (see identification

plate 3 276) and the EC kerb

weight.

To calculate the payload, enter

the data for your vehicle in the

weights table at the front of this

manual.

The EC kerb weight includes

weights for the driver (68 kg),

luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel

tank 90% full).

Optional equipment and

accessories increase the kerb

weight.

● Driving with a roof load increases

the sensitivity of the vehicle to

cross-winds and has a

detrimental effect on vehicle

handling due to the vehicle's

higher centre of gravity.

Distribute the load evenly and

secure it properly with retaining

straps. Adjust the tyre pressure

and vehicle speed according to

the load conditions. Check and

retighten the straps frequently.

Storage 91

Do not drive faster than

120 km/h.

The permissible roof load is

75 kg. The roof load is the

combined weight of the roof rack

and the load.

92 Instruments and controls

Instruments and

controls

Controls ....................................... 93

Steering wheel adjustment ........ 93

Steering wheel controls ............. 93

Heated steering wheel ............... 93

Horn ........................................... 94

Windscreen wiper and washer ..94

Rear window wiper and

washer ...................................... 96

Outside temperature .................. 97

Clock ......................................... 97

Power outlets ............................. 99

Inductive charging ................... 100

Ashtrays .................................. 101

Warning lights, gauges and indi‐

cators ......................................... 101

Instrument cluster .................... 101

Speedometer ........................... 104

Odometer ................................ 105

Trip odometer .......................... 105

Tachometer ............................. 106

Fuel gauge .............................. 106

Engine coolant temperature

gauge ..................................... 106

Service display ........................ 107

Control indicators .................... 108

Turn lights ................................ 108

Seat belt reminder ................... 108

Airbag and belt tensioners ....... 109

Airbag deactivation .................. 109

Charging system ..................... 110

Malfunction indicator light ........ 110

Brake and clutch system ......... 110

Electric parking brake .............. 110

Electric parking brake fault ...... 110

Antilock brake system (ABS) ... 111

Gear shifting ............................ 111

Following distance ................... 111

Lane keep assist ..................... 111

Electronic Stability Control off . 111

Electronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system ......... 111

Traction Control system off ..... 112

Engine coolant temperature .... 112

Preheating ............................... 112

AdBlue ..................................... 112

Tyre pressure monitoring

system .................................... 112

Engine oil pressure .................. 112

Low fuel ................................... 113

Immobiliser .............................. 113

Exterior light ............................ 113

High beam ............................... 113

High beam assist ..................... 113

LED headlights ........................ 113

Front fog lights ......................... 114

Rear fog light ........................... 114

Cruise control .......................... 114

Adaptive cruise control ............ 114

Vehicle detected ahead ........... 114

Pedestrian detection ................ 114

Speed limiter ........................... 114

Traffic sign assistant ................ 115

Door open ................................ 115

Displays ..................................... 115

Driver Information Centre ........ 115

Info Display .............................. 121

Vehicle messages ...................... 122

Warning chimes ....................... 123

Battery voltage ........................ 123

Vehicle personalisation .............. 124

Telematics service ..................... 129

Emergency call ........................ 129

Instruments and controls 93

Controls

Steering wheel adjustment

Unlock lever, adjust steering wheel,

then engage lever and ensure it is

fully locked.

Do not adjust steering wheel unless

vehicle is stationary and steering

wheel lock has been released.

Steering wheel controls

Cruise control and speed limiter are

operated via the controls on the left

side of the steering wheel.

Additionally, forward collision alert

can be set by using the controls on the

left side of the steering wheel.

Infotainment system can be operated

via the controls on the steering wheel.

Driver assistance systems 3 176.

Further information is available in the

Infotainment manual.

Heated steering wheel

Activate heating by pressing *.

Activation is indicated by the LED in

the button.

94 Instruments and controls

The recommended grip areas of the

steering wheel are heated quicker

and to a higher temperature than the

other areas.

Heating is operational when the

engine is running and during an

Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 157.

Horn

Press j.

Windscreen wiper and

washer

Windscreen wiper with adjustable

wiper interval

HI : fast

LO : slow

INT : interval wiping

OFF : off

For a single wipe when the

windscreen wiper is off, press the

lever downwards to position 1x.

Do not use if the windscreen is frozen.

Switch off in car washes.

Adjustable wiper interval

Wiper lever in position INT.

Turn the adjuster wheel to adjust the

wiping frequency.

Instruments and controls 95

Windscreen wiper with rain

sensor

HI : fast

LO : slow

AUTO : automatic wiping with rain

sensor

OFF : off

In AUTO position, the rain sensor

detects the amount of water on the

windscreen and automatically

regulates the frequency of the

windscreen wiper.

For a single wipe when the

windscreen wiper is off, press the

lever downwards to position 1x.

Do not use if the windscreen is frozen.

Switch off in car washes.

Adjustable sensitivity of the rain

sensor

Wiper lever in position AUTO.

Turn the adjuster wheel to adjust the

sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Keep the sensor free from dust, dirt

and ice.

Rain sensor function can be activated

or deactivated in the Vehicle

personalisation.

Select the relevant setting in Settings

I Vehicle in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 121.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

96 Instruments and controls

Windscreen washer

Pull lever. Washer fluid is sprayed

onto the windscreen and the wiper

wipes a few times.

Washer fluid 3 227.

Rear window wiper and

washer

Rear window wiper

OFF : off

INT : intermittent operation

ON : continuous operation

Do not use if the rear window is

frozen.

Switch off in car washes.

The rear window wiper comes on

automatically when the windscreen

wiper is switched on and reverse gear

is engaged.

Activation or deactivation of this

function can be changed in the menu

Settings in the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Rear window washer

Push lever.

Washer fluid is sprayed onto the rear

window and the wiper wipes a few

times.

The rear window washer system is

deactivated when the fluid level is

low.

Washer fluid 3 227.

Instruments and controls 97

Outside temperature

A drop in temperature is indicated

immediately and a rise in temperature

after a time delay.

Illustration shows an example.

If outside temperature drops to 3 °C,

a warning message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

9Warning

The road surface may already be

icy even though the display

indicates a few degrees above

0 °C.

Clock

Date and time are shown in the

Info Display.

Info Display 3 121.

Graphic Info Display

Press MENU to open the respective

audio menu.

Select Time and Date.

Set Time

Select Set Time to enter the

respective submenu.

Select Auto Set at the bottom of the

screen. Activate either On - RDS or

Off (Manual).

If Off (Manual) is selected, adjust

hours and minutes.

Repeatedly select 12-24 HR at the

bottom of the screen to choose a time

mode.

If the 12-hour mode is selected, a

third column for AM and PM selection

is displayed. Select the desired

option.

98 Instruments and controls

Set Date

Select Set Date to enter the

respective submenu.

Select Auto Set at the bottom of the

screen. Activate either On - RDS or

Off (Manual).

If Off (Manual) is selected, adjust the

date settings.

7'' Colour Info Display

Press ; and then select Settings.

Select Time and Date to display the

respective submenu.

Set Time Format

To select the desired time format,

touch the screen buttons 12 h or 24 h.

Set Date Format

To select the desired date format,

select Set Date Format and choose

between the available options in the

submenu.

Auto Set

To choose whether time and date are

to be set automatically or manually,

select Auto Set.

For time and date to be set

automatically, select On - RDS.

For time and date to be set manually,

select Off - Manual. If Auto Set is set

to Off - Manual, the submenu items

Set Time and Set Date become

available.

Set time and date

To adjust the time and date settings,

select Set Time or Set Date.

Touch + and - to adjust the settings.

8'' Colour Info Display

Press ; and then select the

Settings icon.

Select Time and Date.

Set time

Select Set Time to enter the

respective submenu.

Select Auto Set at the bottom of the

screen. Activate either On - RDS or

Off - Manual.

If Off - Manual is selected, adjust

hours and minutes by touching n or

Instruments and controls 99

Touch 12-24 Hr on the right side of the

screen to select a time mode.

If 12-hour mode is selected, a third

column for AM and PM setting is

displayed. Select the desired option.

Set date

Select Set Date to enter the

respective submenu.

Note

If date information is automatically

provided, this menu item is not

available.

Select Auto Set at the bottom of the

screen. Activate either On - RDS or

Off - Manual.

If Off - Manual is selected, adjust the

date by touching n or o.

Clock display

Select Clock Display to enter the

respective submenu.

To turn off the digital clock display in

the menus, select Off.

Power outlets

A 12 V power outlet is located in the

centre console. With ignition off, this

power outlet is deactivated.

Do not exceed the maximum power

consumption of 120 W.

Electrical accessories that are

connected must comply with the

electromagnetic compatibility

requirements laid down in

DIN VDE 40 839.

Do not connect any current-delivering

accessories, e.g. electrical charging

devices or batteries.

Do not damage the outlets by using

unsuitable plugs.

Stop-start system 3 157.

USB port

Depending on the infotainment

system, one or two USB ports for

charging devices are located in

between the front seats. These ports

have also a data connection to the

Infotainment system. For further

information, see Infotainment

manual.

100 Instruments and controls

USB charging port

Two USB ports for charging devices

only are located in the back of the

centre console.

Each socket provides 2.1 A at 5 V.

Note

The sockets must always be kept

clean and dry.

Inductive charging

9Warning

Inductive charging can affect the

operation of implanted

pacemakers or other medical

devices. If applicable, seek

medical advice before using the

inductive charging device.

9Warning

Remove any metal objects from

the charging device before

charging a mobile device, as these

objects could become very hot.

To charge a device, the ignition must

be switched on.

The charging slot is located below the

front armrest.

To charge a mobile device:

1. Remove all objects from the

charging slot otherwise the

system may not charge.

2. Insert the mobile device with the

display facing to the rear in the

charging slot. Charging status is

indicated in the Info display 0 and

shows if mobile device is properly

positioned.

Instruments and controls 101

If 0 is not displayed, remove mobile

device from the slot. Turn mobile

device 180 degrees and wait three

seconds before inserting mobile

device again.

PMA, Qi and A4WP compatible

mobile devices can be charged

inductively.

On some mobile devices, a back

cover with an integrated coil or a

jacket may be required to use

inductive charging.

The mobile device must be smaller

than 8 cm in width and 15 cm in length

to fit into the charging device.

Protective cover for the mobile device

could have impact on the inductive

charging.

Ashtrays

Caution

To be used only for ash and not for

combustible rubbish.

A portable ashtray can be placed in

the cupholders.

Warning lights, gauges

and indicators

Instrument cluster

Depending on the version, two

instrument clusters are available:

● Baselevel

● Uplevel

Uplevel instrument cluster can be

displayed as Sport mode or Tour

mode.

Baselevel instrument cluster

102 Instruments and controls

Uplevel instrument cluster, Sport mode

Instruments and controls 103

Uplevel instrument cluster, Touring mode

104 Instruments and controls

Overview

OTurn lights 3 108

XSeat belt reminder 3 108

vAirbag and belt tensioners

3 109

VAirbag deactivation 3 109

pCharging system 3 110

ZMalfunction indicator light

3 110

RBrake and clutch system 3 110

mElectric parking brake 3 110

jElectric parking brake fault

3 110

uAntilock brake system (ABS)

3 111

RGear shifting 3 111

EFollowing distance 3 111

aLane keep assist 3 111

aElectronic Stability Control off

3 111

bElectronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system 3 111

kTraction Control system off

3 112

WEngine coolant temperature

3 112

!Preheating 3 112

ùAdBlue 3 112

wTyre pressure monitoring

system 3 112

IEngine oil pressure 3 112

YLow fuel 3 113

dImmobiliser 3 113

8Exterior light 3 113

CHigh beam 3 113

fHigh beam assist 3 113

fLED headlights 3 113

>Front fog lights 3 114

øRear fog light 3 114

mCruise control 3 114 / Adaptive

cruise control 3 114

CAdaptive cruise control 3 114

AVehicle detected ahead 3 114

7Pedestrian detected ahead

3 114

LSpeed limiter 3 114

LTraffic sign assistant 3 115

hDoor open 3 115

Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

Instruments and controls 105

Odometer

The total recorded distance is

displayed in km.

Trip odometer

The recorded distance since the last

reset is displayed on the trip computer

page.

Trip odometer counts up to

9,999 km and then restarts at 0.

Two trip odometer pages are

selectable for different trips.

Baselevel instrument cluster

Select ; on main menu. Choose

page Trip 1 or Trip 2 by pressing P

or N on the steering wheel.

Each trip odometer can be reset

separately when ignition is on: select

respective page, press Å on the

steering wheel. Confirm by choosing

Yes: when the confirmation message

is displayed.

Uplevel instrument cluster

Select Info page on main menu.

Choose page Trip A or Trip B by

pressing P or N on the steering

wheel.

Each trip odometer can be reset

separately when ignition is on: select

respective page, press >. Confirm

reset by pressing Å.

106 Instruments and controls

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed.

Drive in a low engine speed range for

each gear as much as possible.

Caution

If the needle is in the red warning

zone, the maximum permitted

engine speed is exceeded. Engine

at risk.

Fuel gauge

Displays the fuel level or gas content

(CNG) in the tank depending on the

current operation mode.

The arrow indicates the vehicle side

where the fuel filler flap is located.

For bi-fuel engines, the Driver

Information Centre displays the fuel

level for the fuel type which is

currently not in operation. The fuel

level for the fuel type which is

currently in operation is shown in the

fuel gauge.

Control indicator r illuminates if the

fuel quantity is low.

For bi-fuel engines: In petrol mode,

the control indicator r illuminates

before the needle reaches the red

area.

Refuel immediately if r flashes.

Never run the fuel tank dry.

Because of the fuel remaining in the

tank, the top-up quantity may be less

than the specified fuel tank capacity.

Engine coolant temperature

gauge

Displays the coolant temperature.

Instruments and controls 107

50 : engine operating

temperature not yet

reached

central

area : normal operating

temperature

130 : temperature too high

Caution

If engine coolant temperature is

too high, stop vehicle, switch off

engine. Danger to engine. Check

coolant level.

Service display

The engine oil life system informs

when to change the engine oil and

filter. Based on driving conditions, the

interval at which an engine oil and

filter change will be indicated can vary

considerably.

When the system has calculated that

engine oil life has been diminished,

Change Engine Oil Soon appears in

the Driver Information Centre. Have

engine oil and filter changed by a

workshop within one week or

500 km, whichever occurs first.

This can be an additional engine oil

and filter change or part of a regular

service.

The remaining oil life duration menu

is displayed in the Driver Information

Centre 3 115.

On Midlevel display select the

Settings Menu by pressing MENU on

the indicator lever. Turn the adjuster

wheel to select the Remaining Oil

Life page.

108 Instruments and controls

On Uplevel display select Info Menu

by pressing p on steering wheel.

Press P to select Remaining Oil

Life page.

Remaining oil life duration is indicated

in percentage.

Reset

On Midlevel display press SET/CLR

on the indicator lever for several

seconds to reset. The ignition must be

switched on but engine not running.

On Uplevel display press > on

steering wheel to open the subfolder.

Select Reset and confirm by pressing

9 for several seconds. The ignition

must be switched on but engine not

running.

The system must be reset every time

the engine oil is changed to allow

proper functionality. Seek the

assistance of a workshop.

Next service

A message appears in the Driver

Information Centre, when

maintenance of the vehicle is

required. Have maintenance work

carried out by a workshop within one

week or 500 km, whichever occurs

first.

Service information 3 272.

Control indicators

The control indicators described are

not present in all vehicles. The

description applies to all instrument

versions. Depending on the

equipment, the position of the control

indicators may vary. When the

ignition is switched on, most control

indicators will illuminate briefly as a

functionality test.

The control indicator colours mean:

red : danger, important reminder

yellow : warning, information, fault

green : confirmation of activation

blue : confirmation of activation

white : confirmation of activation

See all control indicators on different

instrument clusters 3 101.

Turn lights

O illuminates or flashes green.

Illuminates briefly

The parking lights are switched on.

Flashes

The turn lights or the hazard warning

flashers are activated.

Rapid flashing: failure of the turn

lights or associated fuse, failure of the

turn lights on the trailer.

Bulb replacement 3 230.

Fuses 3 241.

Turn lights 3 136.

Seat belt reminder

Seat belt reminder on front seats

X for driver's seat illuminates or

flashes red in the instrument cluster.

Instruments and controls 109

k for front passenger seat illuminates

or flashes red in the roof console,

when seat is occupied.

Illuminates

After the ignition has been switched

on until the seat belt has been

fastened.

Flashes

After having started the engine for a

maximum of 100 seconds until the

seat belt has been fastened.

Seat belt status on rear seats

(vehicles with Midlevel display)

X illuminates or flashes white or grey

in the Driver Information Centre, after

having started the engine.

Illuminates white

Seat belt is unfastened.

Illuminates grey

Seat belt has been fastened.

Flashes white or grey

Fastened seat belt has been

unfastened.

Fastening the seat belt 3 59.

Seat belt status on rear seats

(vehicles with Uplevel display)

X illuminates green or grey or flashes

yellow in the Driver Information

Centre, after having started the

engine.

Illuminates grey

Seat belt is unfastened.

Illuminates green

Seat belt has been fastened.

Flashes yellow

Fastened seat belt has been

unfastened.

Fastening the seat belt 3 59.

Airbag and belt tensioners

v illuminates red.

When the ignition is switched on, the

control indicator illuminates for

approx. 4 seconds. If it does not

illuminate, does not go out after

four seconds or illuminates whilst

driving, there is a fault in the airbag

system. Seek the assistance of a

workshop. The airbags and belt

pretensioners may fail to trigger in the

event of an accident.

Deployment of the belt pretensioners

or airbags is indicated by continuous

illumination of v.

9Warning

Have the cause of the fault

remedied immediately by a

workshop.

Belt pretensioners 3 58.

Airbag system 3 60.

Airbag deactivation

V illuminates yellow.

The front passenger airbag is

activated.

* illuminates yellow.

110 Instruments and controls

The front passenger airbag is

deactivated.

Airbag deactivation 3 65.

Charging system

p illuminates red.

Illuminates when the ignition is

switched on and extinguishes shortly

after the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine is

running

Stop, switch off engine. Vehicle

battery is not charging. Engine

cooling may be interrupted. The

brake servo unit may cease to be

effective. Seek the assistance of a

workshop.

Malfunction indicator light

Z illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates when the ignition is

switched on and extinguishes shortly

after the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine is

running

Fault in the emission control system.

The permitted emission limits may be

exceeded.

The cleaning process of the exhaust

filter is potentially not possible.

Seek the assistance of a workshop

immediately.

Flashes when the engine is

running

Fault that could lead to catalytic

converter damage. Ease up on the

accelerator until the flashing stops.

Seek the assistance of a workshop

immediately.

Brake and clutch system

R illuminates red.

The brake and clutch fluid level is too

low, when manual parking brake is

not applied 3 227.

9Warning

Stop. Do not continue your

journey. Consult a workshop.

Illuminates when the manual parking

brake is applied and ignition is

switched on 3 171.

Electric parking brake

m illuminates or flashes red.

Illuminates

Electric parking brake is applied

3 171.

Flashes

Electric parking brake is not fully

applied or released. Depress the

brake pedal and attempt to reset the

system by first releasing then

applying the electric parking brake. If

m remains flashing, do not drive and

seek the assistance of a workshop.

Electric parking brake fault

j illuminates or flashes yellow.

Instruments and controls 111

Illuminates

Electric parking brake is operating

with degraded performance 3 171.

Flashes

Electric parking brake is in service

mode. Stop vehicle, apply and

release the electric parking brake to

reset.

9Warning

Have the cause of the fault

remedied immediately by a

workshop. Avoid parking on

inclines until the cause of the fault

has been remedied.

Antilock brake system

(ABS)

u illuminates yellow.

Illuminates for a few seconds after the

ignition is switched on. The system is

ready for operation when the control

indicator extinguishes.

If the control indicator does not go out

after a few seconds, or if it illuminates

while driving, there is a fault in the

ABS. The brake system remains

operational but without ABS

regulation.

Antilock brake system 3 170.

Gear shifting

R or S with the number of a higher or

lower gear is indicated, when up- or

downshifting is recommended for fuel

saving reasons.

Following distance

E indicates the following distance

setting of the alert timing sensitivity

for the forward collision alert using

filled distance bars.

Forward collision alert 3 187.

Lane keep assist

a illuminates green or yellow, or

flashes yellow.

Illuminates green

The system is switched on and ready

to operate.

Illuminates yellow

The system approaches a detected

lane marking without using the turn

lights in that direction.

Flashes yellow

The system recognizes that the lane

is departed significantly.

Lane keep assist 3 210.

Electronic Stability Control

off

n illuminates yellow.

The system is deactivated.

Electronic Stability Control

and Traction Control system

b illuminates or flashes yellow.

112 Instruments and controls

Illuminates

A fault in the system is present.

Continued driving is possible. Driving

stability, however, may deteriorate

depending on road surface

conditions.

Have the cause of the fault remedied

by a workshop.

Flashes

The system is actively engaged.

Engine output may be reduced and

the vehicle may be braked

automatically to a small degree.

Electronic Stability Control 3 174.

Traction Control system 3 173.

Traction Control system off

k illuminates yellow.

The system is deactivated.

Engine coolant temperature

W illuminates red.

Illuminates when the engine is

running

Stop, switch off engine.

Caution

Coolant temperature too high.

Check coolant level immediately

3 226.

If there is sufficient coolant, consult a

workshop.

Preheating

! illuminates yellow.

Preheating of Diesel engine is

activated. Only activates when

outside temperature is low. Start the

engine when control indicator

extinguishes.

AdBlue

Y flashes yellow.

AdBlue level is low. Refill AdBlue

soon to avoid prevention of the

engine start.

AdBlue 3 163.

Tyre pressure monitoring

system

w illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates

Tyre pressure loss. Stop immediately

and check tyre pressure.

Flashes

Fault in system or tyre without

pressure sensor mounted (e.g. spare

wheel). After 60 to 90 seconds the

control indicator illuminates

continuously. Consult a workshop.

Engine oil pressure

I illuminates red.

Illuminates when the ignition is

switched on and extinguishes shortly

after the engine starts.

Instruments and controls 113

Illuminates when the engine is

running

Caution

Engine lubrication may be

interrupted. This may result in

damage to the engine and/or

locking of the drive wheels.

1. Select neutral gear.

2. Move out of the flow of traffic as

quickly as possible without

impeding other vehicles.

3. Switch off ignition.

9Warning

When the engine is off,

considerably more force is needed

to brake and steer.

During an Autostop, the brake

servo unit will still be operational.

Do not remove key until vehicle is

stationary, otherwise the steering

wheel lock could engage

unexpectedly.

Keep engine turned off and let the

vehicle be towed to a workshop

3 225.

Low fuel

Y illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates

Level in fuel tank is too low.

Flashes

Fuel used up. Refuel immediately.

Never run the tank dry.

Refuelling 3 214.

Catalytic converter 3 163.

Bleeding the diesel fuel system

3 229.

Immobiliser

d flashes yellow.

Fault in the immobiliser system. The

engine cannot be started.

Exterior light

8 illuminates green.

The exterior lights are on 3 130.

High beam

C illuminates blue.

Illuminated when high beam is on or

during headlight flash 3 133.

High beam assist

f illuminates green.

The high beam assist is activated

3 131.

LED headlights

f illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates

Fault in the system.

Seek the assistance of a workshop.

Flashes

System is switched to symmetrical

low beam.

114 Instruments and controls

Control indicator f flashes for approx.

4 seconds after the ignition is

switched on as a reminder for

symmetrical headlight 3 133.

Front fog lights

> illuminates green.

The front fog lights are on 3 136.

Rear fog light

ø illuminates yellow.

The rear fog light is on 3 136.

Cruise control

m illuminates white or green.

Illuminates white

The system is on.

Illuminates green

Cruise control is active. Set speed is

indicated in the Driver Information

Centre.

Cruise control 3 176.

Adaptive cruise control

m illuminates white or green.

C illuminates in the Driver

Information Centre.

m illuminates white

The system is on.

m illuminates green

Adaptive cruise control is active.

When Adaptive cruise control is on or

active, C with the set speed is

indicated in the Driver Information

Centre.

Adaptive cruise control 3 179.

m illuminates blue

Adaptive cruise control is overrided,

when the accelerator pedal is applied.

When the vehicle is launch from stop

by using the accelerator pedal.

Vehicle detected ahead

A illuminates green or yellow.

Illuminates green

A vehicle ahead is detected in the

same lane.

Illuminates yellow

The distance to a preceding moving

vehicle gets too small or when

approaching another vehicle too

rapidly.

Adaptive cruise control 3 179.

Forward collision alert 3 187.

Pedestrian detection

7 illuminates yellow.

A pedestrian ahead is detected.

Speed limiter

L illuminates white or green.

Illuminates white

The system is on.

Illuminates green

Speed limiter is active. Set speed is

indicated near L symbol.

Instruments and controls 115

Speed limiter 3 177.

Traffic sign assistant

L displays detected traffic signs as

control indicator.

Traffic sign assistant 3 206.

Door open

h illuminates red.

A door or the tailgate is open.

Displays

Driver Information Centre

The Driver Information Centre is

located in the instrument cluster.

Depending on the version and the

instrument cluster, the Driver

Information Centre is available as

Baselevel display or Uplevel display.

Driver Information Centre indicates

depending on the equipment:

● overall and trip odometer

● vehicle information

● trip / fuel information

● driving economy information

● vehicle and warning messages

● audio and infotainment

information

● phone information

● navigation information

● vehicle settings

Baselevel display

Selecting menus and functions

The menus and functions can be

selected via the buttons on the

indicator lever.

116 Instruments and controls

Press MENU to switch between the

main menus or to return from a

submenu to the next higher menu

level.

Turn the adjuster wheel to select a

submenu of the main menu or to set

a numeric value.

Press SET/CLR to select and confirm

a function.

Vehicle and service messages are

popped up in the Driver Information

Centre if required. Confirm messages

by pressing SET/CLR.

Vehicle messages 3 122.

Main menu

Main menus are:

● Trip / fuel information, displayed

by ;, see description below.

● Vehicle information, displayed

by ?, see description below.

● Eco information, displayed by

@, see description below.

Some of the displayed functions differ

when the vehicle is being driven or at

a standstill and some functions are

only active when the vehicle is being

driven.

Uplevel display

Selecting menus and functions

The menus and functions can be

selected via the buttons on the right

side in the steering wheel.

Press è to open main menu page.

Browse through main menu by

pressing è or é.

Confirm a main menu page with Å.

Press å or ä to browse through

submenu pages of the currently

selected main menu entry. Use these

buttons also to alter a numeric value.

Press Å to select a function or check

a box in a dialogue.

Instruments and controls 117

Vehicle and service messages are

popped-up in the Driver Information

Centre if required. Confirm messages

by pressing Å.

Vehicle messages 3 122.

Main menu

Main menus are:

● Trip / fuel information, displayed

by Info.

● Audio information, displayed by

Audio.

● Navigation information,

displayed by Navigation.

● Phone information, displayed by

Phone.

● Vehicle information, displayed by

Options.

Some of the displayed functions differ

when the vehicle is being driven or at

a standstill and some functions are

only active when the vehicle is being

driven.

Uplevel instrument cluster can be

displayed as Sport mode or Tour

mode. See Options menu, Display.

Info Menu, ; or "

The following list contains all possible

Info Menu pages. Some may not be

available for your particular vehicle.

Depending on the display some

functions are symbolised.

●Speed

●Trip 1 / Trip A, containing:

Distance

Fuel Economy / Average Fuel

Economy

Average Speed

●Trip 2 / Trip B, containing:

Distance

Fuel Economy / Average Fuel

Economy

Average Speed

●Fuel / Fuel Information,

containing:

Fuel Range

Instant Fuel Economy

●Oil Life

●Tyre Pressure

●Timer

●Traffic Sign Memory

●Following Distance

●Driver Assistance

●Top Consumers

●Economy Trend

●ECO Index

●AdBlue Level

On Baselevel display, the pages Oil

Life, Tyre Pressure, Following

Distance, Traffic Sign Memory,

AdBlue Level, Tyre Load and Speed

Warning are displayed in the Vehicle

information menu, select ?.

Speed

Digital display of the instantaneous

speed.

Trip 1/A or 2/B

Two independent pages 1/A and 2/B

display the current distance, average

fuel consumption and average speed

since a certain reset.

The distance indicator counts up to a

distance of 9,999 km then restarts at

To reset on Baselevel, press Å and

confirm reset. On Uplevel display,

press é and confirm with Å. This

118 Instruments and controls

only resets the values on the current

displayed page. The other Trip page

stays unaffected.

Fuel /Fuel Information

Fuel Range

Range is calculated from current fuel

tank level and current consumption.

The display shows average values.

After refuelling, the range is updated

automatically after a brief delay.

When the fuel level in the tank is low,

a message appears on the display

and control indicator Y in the fuel

gauge illuminates.

When the tank must be refuelled

immediately, a warning message

appears and remains on the display.

Additionally, control indicator Y in the

fuel gauge flashes 3 113.

Instant Fuel Economy

Display of the instantaneous

consumption.

Oil Life

Indicates an estimate of the oil's

useful life. The number in % means

the remaining of current oil life 3 107.

Tyre Pressure

Checks tyre pressure of all wheels

during driving 3 251.

Timer

Baselevel display: start and stop

timer with Å. To reset, hold Å when

timer is not running.

Uplevel display: To start or stop timer,

press Å and Å again. To reset,

press Å, choose Reset and confirm

with Å.

Traffic Sign Memory

Displays the detected traffic signs for

the current route section 3 206.

Following Distance

Displays the distance in seconds to a

preceding moving vehicle 3 189. If

Adaptive cruise control is active this

page shows the following distance

setting instead.

Driver Assistance

Displays the status of several driver

assistance systems:

Adaptive cruise control 3 179.

Forward collision alert 3 187.

Lane keep assist 3 210.

AdBlue Level

Displays the level of the AdBlue tank

3 163.

Eco information menu, @

●Top Consumers

●Economy Trend

●ECO Index

On Uplevel display the pages Top

Consumers, Economy Trend and

ECO Index are displayed in the Info

Menu, see above.

Top Consumers

List of top comfort consumers

currently switched on is displayed in

descending order. Fuel saving

potential is indicated.

During sporadic driving conditions,

the engine will activate the heated

rear window automatically to increase

the engine load. In this event, the

heated rear window is indicated as

one of the top consumers, without

activation by the driver.

Instruments and controls 119

Economy Trend

Displays the average consumption

development over a distance of

50 km. Filled segments display the

consumption in 5 km steps and show

the effect of topography or driving

behaviour on fuel consumption.

ECO Index

The average fuel consumption is

indicated on an economic scale. For

economical driving, adapt driving

style to keep the indicator within the

green area. The more the indicator

moves towards red, the higher is the

fuel consumption. Simultaneously the

average consumption value is

indicated.

Depending on vehicle version, the

Eco Index shows values referring to

trip odometer page A/1 or the current

driving cycle. In the last case, the

indicator is reset when ignition is

switched on the next time.

Audio menu G

Enables browsing for music, selecting

from favourites or changing the audio

source.

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

Phone menu $

Enables managing and performing of

phone calls, scrolling through

contacts or operating hands-free

phoning.

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

Navigation menu §

Enables route guidance.

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

Vehicle information menu, ?,

Options or %

The following list contains all possible

Options Menu pages. Some may not

be available for your particular

vehicle. Depending on the display

some functions are symbolised.

●Units

●Display

●Info Page Options

●Home Page Options

●Adaptive Cruise

●Speed Warning

●Tyre Load

●Gauges

●Software Information

●AdBlue Level

Units

Select display unit system: imperial or

metric.

120 Instruments and controls

Display

Press é and select Sport or Touring

mode. Sport mode includes more

vehicle information, Tour mode

includes more media information.

This setting is only available with

Uplevel display.

Info Page Options

A list of all pages in the Info Menu is

displayed, see above. Select the

pages to be displayed in the Info

Menu. Selected pages have a 0.

Non viewable functions have a blank

checkbox.

Home Page Options

Select, which values are shown on

the Driver Information Center home

page, e.g. speed or fuel range.

Adaptive Cruise

Activates or deactivates adaptive

cruise control 3 179.

Speed Warning

The speed warning page allows you

to set a speed that you do not want to

exceed.

Speed limit can only be set when

speed warning is enabled. Once the

speed is set, this feature can be

turned off by pressing Å while

viewing this page. If the selected

speed limit is exceeded, a pop-up

warning is displayed with a chime.

Tyre Load

The tyre pressure category according

to the actual tyre inflation pressure

can be selected 3 251.

Gauges

●Oil Temperature

Displays engine oil temperature

in degrees Celsius.

●Battery Voltage

Displays the vehicle battery

voltage. During engine running

voltage can vary between 12 V

and 15.5 V. Temporary voltage

below 12 V is possible when high

electrical load is used.

●AdBlue

Displays the level of the Adblue

tank 3 163.

●IFE-AFE

Displays both instantaneous and

average fuel economy.

●Fuel Range

Displays average remaining

distance with remaining fuel in

the tank.

●Blank Page

Displays a blank gauge.

Software information

Displays the open source software

information.

Instruments and controls 121

Info Display

The Info Display is located in the

instrument panel near the instrument

cluster.

Depending on the vehicle

configuration, the vehicle has one of

the following Infotainment systems:

●Multimedia

●Multimedia Navi

●Multimedia Navi Pro

The Info Display can indicate:

● time 3 97

● outside temperature 3 97

● date 3 97

● Infotainment system, see

description in the Infotainment

manual

● climate control settings 3 143

● rear view camera 3 204

● parking assist instructions

3 195

● navigation, see description in the

Infotainment manual

● system messages

● settings for vehicle

personalisation 3 124

Multimedia Navi

Selecting menus and settings

Menus and settings are accessed via

the display.

Press ) to switch on the display.

Press ! to display the home screen.

Touch required menu display icon

with the finger.

Touch a respective icon to confirm a

selection.

Touch 1 to return to the next higher

menu level.

Press ! to return to the home

screen.

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Multimedia / Multimedia Navi Pro

Selecting menus and settings

There are three options to operate the

display:

● via buttons below the display

● by touching the touchscreen with

the finger

● via speech recognition

122 Instruments and controls

Button operation

Press ) to switch on the display.

Press ! to display the home screen.

Press BACK to exit a menu without

changing a setting.

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

Touchscreen operation

Display must be switched on by

pressing ). Touch ! to select the

home screen.

Touch required menu display icon or

select a function with the finger.

Scroll a longer submenu list with the

finger up or down.

Confirm a required function or

selection by touching.

Touch O to exit a menu with saving of

the changed setting.

Touch icon & to leave a menu

without saving.

Touch ! to return to the home

screen.

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

Speech recognition

Description see Infotainment manual.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Vehicle messages

Messages are indicated in the Driver

Information Centre, in some cases

together with a warning chime.

On Midlevel display press SET/CLR

on the indicator lever to confirm a

message.

Instruments and controls 123

On Uplevel display press 9 on the

steering wheel to confirm a message.

Vehicle and service messages

The vehicle messages are displayed

as text. Follow the instructions given

in the messages.

Messages in the Info Display

Some important messages may

appear additionally in the

Info Display. Some messages only

pop-up for a few seconds.

Warning chimes

If several warnings appear at the

same time, only one warning chime

will sound.

When starting the engine or whilst

driving

The warning chime regarding not

fastened seat belts has priority over

any other warning chime.

● If seat belt is not fastened.

● If a door or the tailgate is not fully

closed when starting off.

● If a certain speed is exceeded

with parking brake applied.

● If adaptive cruise control

deactivates automatically.

● If approaching a vehicle ahead

too closely.

● If a programmed speed or speed

limit is exceeded.

● If a warning message appears in

the Driver Information Centre.

● If the electronic key is not in the

passenger compartment.

● If the parking assist detects an

object.

● If an unintended lane change

occurs.

● If the exhaust filter has reached

the maximum filling level.

● If safety function of the power

tailgate detects obstacles in the

moving area.

When the vehicle is parked and /

or the driver's door is opened

● With exterior lights on.

During an Autostop

● If the driver's door is opened.

● If any condition for an Autostop is

not fulfilled.

Battery voltage

When the vehicle battery voltage is

running low, a warning message will

appear in the Driver Information

Centre.

124 Instruments and controls

1. Switch off any electrical

consumers which are not required

for a safe drive, e.g. seat heating,

heated rear window or other main

consumers.

2. Charge the vehicle battery by

driving continuously for a while or

by using a charging device.

The warning message will disappear

after the engine has been started

twice without a voltage drop.

If the vehicle battery cannot be

recharged, have the cause of the fault

remedied by a workshop.

Vehicle personalisation

The vehicle's behaviour can be

personalised by changing the settings

in the Info Display.

Some of the personal settings for

different drivers can be memorised

individually for each vehicle key.

Memorised settings 3 25.

Depending on vehicle equipment and

country-specific regulations some of

the functions described below may

not be available.

Some functions are only displayed or

active when the engine is running.

Personal settings

Multimedia Navi

Press !, select Settings and then

Vehicle on the touchscreen.

In the corresponding submenus the

following settings can be changed:

Vehicle

●Climate & Air Quality

Auto Fan Max Speed: Modifies

the level of the cabin airflow of the

climate control in automatic

mode.

Auto Heated Seats:

Automatically activates the seat

heating.

Auto Defog: Supports

windscreen dehumidification by

automatically selecting the

necessary settings and

automatic air conditioning mode.

Instruments and controls 125

Auto Rear Defog: Automatically

activates heated rear window.

●Collision / Detection Systems

Rear View Camera Guidelines:

Activates or deactivates the rear

view camera guidelines on the

Info Display.

Forward Collision Alert :

Activates or deactivates forward

collision alert.

Auto Collision Preparation:

Activates or deactivates the

automatic brake functionality of

the vehicle in the event of

imminent collision danger. The

following is selectable: the

system will take over brake

control, warn by chimes only or is

deactivated completely.

Forward Collision System:

Activates or deactivates warning

chimes or automatic brake

functionality in the event of

imminent collision danger.

Front pedestrian detection:

Activates or deactivates warning

chimes or automatic brake

functionality of the pedestrian

detection system.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert:

Activates or deactivates rear

cross traffic alert.

Park Assist: Activates or

deactivates the parking assist.

Activation is selectable with or

without attached trailer coupling.

Go Notifier: Activates or

deactivates the reminder

message to drive off when the

adaptive cruise control holds the

vehicle at standstill.

Side Blind Zone Alert: Activates

or deactivates side blind zone

alert.

●Comfort and Convenience

Auto Memory Recall : Changes

the settings to the recall of

memorised settings for power

seat adjustment.

Easy Exit Driver Seat: Activates

or deactivates easy exit function

of the power seat.

Chime Volume: Changes the

volume of warning chimes.

Reverse Tilt Mirror: Activates or

deactivates the parking assist

function of the exterior mirrors.

Auto Mirror Folding: Activates or

deactivates folding of the exterior

mirrors with the remote control.

Personalization By Driver:

Activates or deactivates the

personalisation function.

Rain Sense Wipers: Activates or

deactivates automatic wiping

with rain sensor.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear:

Activates or deactivates

automatic switching on of the

rear window wiper when reverse

gear is engaged.

Extended Hill Start Assist:

Toggles between hill start assist

and extended hold hill start assist

●Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights: Activates

or deactivates the entry lighting.

Exit Lighting: Activates or

deactivates and changes the

duration of exit lighting.

126 Instruments and controls

Left or Right Hand Traffic :

Changes between lighting for left

or right-hand traffic.

Adaptive Forward Lighting :

Changes the settings of the

functions of the LED headlights.

●Power Door Locks

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out:

Activates or deactivates the door

locking function while a door is

open.

Auto Door Lock: Activates or

deactivates the automatic door

locking function after driving off.

Delayed Door Lock: Activates or

deactivates the delayed door

locking function. This feature

delays the actual locking of the

doors until all doors are closed.

●Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Remote Unlock Light Feedback:

Activates or deactivates the

hazard warning flasher feedback

whilst unlocking.

Remote Lock Feedback:

Changes what kind of feedback

is given when locking the vehicle.

Remote Door Unlock: Changes

the configuration to unlock only

the driver's door or the whole

vehicle whilst unlocking.

Relock Remotely Unlocked

Doors: Activates or deactivates

the automatic relock function

after unlocking without opening

the vehicle.

Remote Window Operation:

Activates or deactivates the

operation of power windows with

electronic key.

Passive Door Unlock: Changes

the configuration to unlock only

the driver's door or the whole

vehicle whilst unlocking.

Passive Door Lock : Activates or

deactivates the passive locking

function. This feature locks the

vehicle automatically after

several seconds if all doors have

been closed and an electronic

key has been removed from the

vehicle.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert:

Activates or deactivates the

warning chime when the

electronic key remains in the

vehicle.

Personal settings

Multimedia / Multimedia Navi Pro

Press !, then select the % icon.

The Settings menu contains the

following submenus, which can be

selected in the upper menu bar:

●System

●Apps

●Vehicle

●Personal

Instruments and controls 127

System

To change Time/Date, see Clock

3 97.

Select Language to open a list of

available languages for the Info

Display and Driver Information

Center. Select desired language.

Apps

See Infotainment manual.

Vehicle

●Climate and Air Quality

Auto Fan Speed: Modifies the

level of the cabin airflow of the

climate control in automatic

mode.

Auto heated seats: Automatically

activates the seat heating.

Auto Demist: Supports

windscreen dehumidification by

automatically selecting the

necessary settings and

automatic air conditioning mode.

Auto Rear Demist: Automatically

activates heated rear window.

●Collision/Detection Systems

Forward Collision System:

Deactivates the system

completely, activates warning

chimes only or warning chimes in

combination with automatic

brake functionality.

Front Pedestrian Detection:

Activates warning chimes only or

warning chimes in combination

with automatic brake functionality

or deactivates the system

completely.

Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier:

Activates or deactivates the

reminder message to drive off

when the adaptive cruise control

holds the vehicle at standstill.

Lane Change Alert: Activates or

deactivates side blind zone alert.

Park Assist: Activates or

deactivates the parking assist.

Activation is selectable with or

without attached trailer coupling.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert:

Activates or deactivates rear

cross traffic alert.

●Comfort and Convenience

Auto Memory Recall: Changes

the settings to the recall of

memorised settings for power

seat adjustment.

Easy Exit Driver's Seat: Activates

or deactivates easy exit function

of the power seat.

Chime Volume: Changes the

volume of warning chimes.

Handsfree Liftgate/Boot Lid

Control: Changes the hands-free

function settings of the power

tailgate.

Reverse Tilt Mirror: Changes the

parking assist function of the

exterior mirrors.

Auto Mirror Folding: Activates or

deactivates folding of the exterior

mirrors with the remote control.

Personalisation by Driver:

Activates or deactivates the

personalisation function,

depending on which key is being

used.

Rain Sense Wipers: Activates or

deactivates automatic wiping

with rain sensor.

128 Instruments and controls

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear:

Activates or deactivates

automatic switching on of the

rear window wiper when reverse

gear is engaged.

Extended Hill Start Assist:

Toggles between hill start assist

and extended hold hill start assist

●Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights: Activates

or deactivates the entry lighting.

Exit Lighting: Activates or

deactivates and changes the

duration of exit lighting.

Left or Right-Hand Traffic:

Changes between lighting for left

or right-hand traffic.

Adaptive Forward Lighting:

Changes the settings of the LED

headlights.

●Power Door Locks

Open Door Anti-Lock Out:

Activates or deactivates the door

locking function while a door is

open.

Auto Door Lock: Activates or

deactivates the automatic door

locking function after driving off.

Delayed Door Lock: Activates or

deactivates the delayed door

locking function. This feature

delays the actual locking of the

doors until all doors are closed.

●Remote Lock, Unlock and Start

Remote Unlock Light Feedback:

Activates or deactivates the

hazard warning flasher feedback

whilst unlocking.

Remote Lock Feedback:

Changes what kind of feedback

is given when locking the vehicle.

Remote Door Unlock: Changes

the configuration to unlock only

the driver's door or the whole

vehicle whilst unlocking.

Relock Doors Unlocked

Remotely: Activates or

deactivates the automatic relock

function after unlocking without

opening the vehicle.

Remote Window Operation:

Activates or deactivates the

operation of power windows with

electronic key.

Passive Door Unlock: Changes

the configuration to unlock only

the driver's door or the whole

vehicle whilst unlocking.

Passive Door Lock: Activates or

deactivates the passive locking

function. This feature locks the

vehicle automatically after

several seconds if all doors have

been closed and an electronic

key has been removed from the

vehicle.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert:

Activates or deactivates the

warning chime when the

electronic key remains in the

vehicle.

Personal

See Infotainment manual.

Instruments and controls 129

Telematics service

Emergency call

Emergency call function

Vehicles featuring the emergency call

function are equipped with a red

SOS button in the overhead console.

The emergency call function will

establish a connection to the nearest

public safety answering point (PSAP).

A minimum set of data including

vehicle and location information will

be sent to the PSAP.

Note

Establishing an emergency call may

not be possible in areas without

sufficient network availability or due

to hardware damage during an

accident.

Automatic crash notification

In case of an accident with airbag

deployment, an automatic

emergency call is established and an

automatic crash notification will be

transmitted to the next public safety

answering point.

Emergency assistance

In case of an emergency you can also

manually place an emergency call by

pressing the red SOS button for more

than two seconds. The LED flashes to

confirm that a connection to the

nearest PSAP is being established.

The LED illuminates steadily as long

as the call is active.

Pressing the SOS button immediately

a second time will terminate the call.

The LED switches off.

130 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior lighting .......................... 130

Light switch .............................. 130

Automatic light control ............. 131

High beam assist ..................... 131

High beam ............................... 133

Headlight flash ......................... 133

Headlight range adjustment ....133

Headlights when driving

abroad .................................... 133

Daytime running lights ............. 134

LED headlights ........................ 134

Hazard warning flashers .......... 135

Turn lights ................................ 136

Front fog lights ......................... 136

Rear fog light ........................... 136

Parking lights ........................... 137

Reversing lights ....................... 137

Misted light covers ................... 137

Interior lighting ........................... 137

Instrument panel illumination

control ..................................... 137

Interior lights ............................ 138

Reading lights .......................... 138

Sun visor lights ........................ 138

Lighting features ........................ 139

Centre console lighting ............ 139

Entry lighting ............................ 139

Exit lighting .............................. 139

Battery discharge protection .... 140

Exterior lighting

Light switch

Turn light switch:

AUTO : automatic light control

switches automatically

between daytime running

light and headlight

8: sidelights

9: headlights

When switching on the ignition,

automatic light control is active.

Control indicator 8 3 113.

Lighting 131

Tail lights

Tail lights are illuminated together

with low/high beam and sidelights.

Automatic light control

When the automatic light control

function is switched on and the

engine is running, the system

switches between daytime running

lights and headlights automatically

depending on the external lighting

conditions and information given by

the rain sensor system.

Daytime running light 3 134.

Automatic headlight activation

During poor lighting conditions

headlights are switched on.

Additionally, headlights are switched

on if the windscreen wipers have

been activated for several wipes.

LED headlights 3 134.

Tunnel detection

When a tunnel is entered headlights

are switched on immediately.

High beam assist

The camera in the windscreen

detects the lights of oncoming or

preceding vehicles. Once activated,

high beam assist remains active and

switches high beam on and off

automatically. The latest setting of the

high beam assist will remain after the

ignition is switched on again.

It switches automatically to low beam

when:

● Driving in urban areas.

● It is foggy or snowy.

● Fog lights are switched on.

If there are no restrictions detected,

the system switches back to high

beam.

This feature allows the high beam to

function as main driving light at night.

Each LED on right or left side is

triggered or faded out particularly

according to the traffic situation. This

gives the best light distribution

without dazzling other road users.

High beam is switched on

automatically at a speed above

50 km/h. High beam is switched off at

a speed below 35 km/h, but high

beam assist remains active.

132 Lighting

Motorway mode

High beam assist includes a special

motorway mode. When driving faster

than 105 km/h on motorways for a

certain time, the light beam becomes

smaller to avoid dazzling of oncoming

traffic.

Activation

Indicator lever with f button

Activate high beam assist by pressing

Indicator lever with or without MENU

button

Activate high beam assist by pushing

the indicator lever twice.

The green control indicator f

illuminates continuously when the

high beam assist is activated, the blue

one 7 illuminates when high beam is

on.

Control indicator f 3 113, 7

3 113.

Deactivation

Indicator lever with or without MENU

button

If high beam assist is active and high

beam is on, pull the lever once to

deactivate high beam assist.

If high beam assist is active and high

beam is off, push the lever twice to

deactivate high beam assist.

Pushing the indicator lever to activate

manual high beam will also

deactivate high beam assist.

Indicator lever with f button

If high beam assist is active and high

beam is on, press f once or pull

indicator lever once to deactivate high

beam assist.

If high beam assist is active and high

beam is off, press f once to

deactivate high beam assist.

Pushing the indicator lever to activate

manual high beam will also

deactivate high beam assist.

Lighting 133

High beam

Push lever to switch from low to high

beam.

Pull lever to deactivate high beam.

High beam assist 3 131.

Headlight flash

To activate the headlight flash, pull

lever.

Pulling lever deactivates high beam.

LED headlights 3 134.

Headlight range adjustment

Manual headlight range

adjustment

Headlight range can be adjusted

manually if vehicle is equipped with

halogen headlights. LED headlights

are adjusted automatically.

Dynamic automatic headlight

levelling 3 134.

To adapt headlight range to the

vehicle load to prevent dazzling: turn

thumb wheel ? to required position.

0 : front seats occupied

1 : all seats occupied

2 : all seats occupied and load

compartment laden

3 : driver's seat occupied and load

compartment laden

Headlights when driving

abroad

When driving in countries where

traffic drives on the opposite side of

the road, the following must be done

for the different headlight versions:

Vehicles with halogen headlights

The headlights do not have to be

adjusted.

Vehicles with LED headlights

Consult a workshop to adjust the

headlights.

Vehicles with Matrix-LED

headlights

Headlights can be set for driving on

the opposite side of the road in the

vehicle personalisation menu via the

Info Display.

134 Lighting

Select the relevant setting in Settings

I Vehicle.

Info Display 3 121.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Every time the ignition is switched on,

f flashes for approx. 4 seconds as a

reminder.

To deactivate, use the same

procedure as described above. f will

not flash when function is

deactivated.

Control indicator f 3 113.

Daytime running lights

Daytime running lights increases

visibility of the vehicle during daylight.

They are switched on automatically

during daytime when engine is

running.

The system switches between

daytime running lights and headlights

automatically, depending on the

lighting conditions.

Automatic light control 3 131.

LED headlights

LED and Matrix-LED headlights for

low and high beam ensure better

visibility under all conditions.

Matrix-LED headlight contains

beyond that a variety of particular

LEDs in each headlight which

enables the control of different

lighting programmes.

Light distribution and intensity of light

are variably triggered depending on

the lighting conditions, road type and

driving situation. The vehicle adapts

the headlights automatically to the

situation to enable optimal light

performance for the driver. Some

functions of the LED headlights can

be deactivated or activated in the

vehicle personalisation menu. Select

the relevant setting in Settings I

Vehicle in the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

The following lighting functions are

available with light switch in position

AUTO or 9.

Town light

Activated automatically at a speed up

to approx. 55 km/h and in situations

with exterior ambient light. The light is

wide and symmetrical. A special

beam pattern is designed to avoid

glare for other road users.

Country light

Activated automatically at a speed

above approx. 55 km/h when driving

in rural areas. The illumination of the

current lane and the side of the road

is improved. Oncoming and

preceding vehicles are not dazzled.

Lighting 135

Curve light

Particular LEDs, based on steering

angle and speed, are additionally

triggered to improve lighting in

curves. This function is activated at

speeds from 40 km/h to 70 km/h and

reacts to steering angle.

Cornering light

When turning off, depending on the

steering angle and the turn lights,

particular LEDs are triggered which

illuminate the direction of travel. It is

activated up to a speed of 40 km/h.

Reverse parking function

To assist driver's orientation when

parking, both corner lights and

reversing light illuminate when

headlights are on and reverse gear is

engaged. They remain illuminated for

a short time after disengaging reverse

gear or until driving faster than

7 km/h in a forward gear.

Automatic headlight levelling

To prevent oncoming traffic from

being dazzled, headlight levelling is

automatically adjusted based on

inclination information measured by

front and rear axle, acceleration or

deceleration and vehicle speed.

Headlights when driving abroad

3 133.

Fault in LED headlight system

When the system detects a failure in

the LED headlight system, it selects a

preset position to avoid dazzling of

oncoming traffic. A warning is

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

Hazard warning flashers

Operated by pressing ¨.

The illustrations show different

versions.

In the event of an accident with airbag

deployment, the hazard warning

flashers are activated automatically.

136 Lighting

Turn lights

up : right turn light

down : left turn light

A resistance point can be felt when

moving the lever.

Constant flashing is activated when

the lever is being moved beyond the

resistance point. It is deactivated

when the steering wheel is moved in

the opposite direction or lever is

manually moved back to its neutral

position.

Activate temporary flashing by

holding the lever just before the

resistance point. Turn lights will flash

until lever is being released.

To activate three flashes, tap the

lever briefly without passing the

resistance point.

With a trailer connected, turn light

flashes six times and tone frequency

changes.

Front fog lights

Operated by pressing >.

Light switch in position AUTO:

switching on front fog lights will switch

headlights on automatically.

Rear fog light

Operated by pressing ø.

Light switch in position AUTO:

switching on rear fog light will switch

headlights on automatically.

Light switch in position 8: rear fog

light can only be switched on with

front fog lights.

Lighting 137

The vehicle rear fog light is

deactivated when towing a trailer or a

plug is connected with the socket, e.

g. when a bicycle carrier is used.

Parking lights

When the vehicle is parked, the

parking lights on one side can be

activated:

1. Switch off ignition.

2. Move the indicator lever all the

way up (right parking lights) or

down (left parking lights).

Confirmed by a signal and the

corresponding turn lights control

indicator.

Reversing lights

The reversing light comes on when

the ignition is on and reverse gear is

selected.

Misted light covers

The inside of the light housing may

mist up briefly in poor, wet and cold

weather conditions, in heavy rain or

after washing. The mist disappears

quickly by itself; to help switch on the

headlights.

Interior lighting

Instrument panel

illumination control

Brightness of the following lights can

be adjusted in position AUTO when

the light sensor detects night

conditions, or in position 8 or 9.

● instrument panel illumination

● Info Display

● illuminated switches and

operation elements

Turn thumb wheel A and hold until

the desired brightness is obtained.

138 Lighting

Interior lights

During entry and exit of the vehicle,

the front and rear courtesy lights

automatically switch on and then off

after a delay.

Note

In the event of an accident with

airbag deployment the courtesy

lights are turned on automatically.

Front courtesy light

w: automatic switching on

and off

press u: on

press v: off

Rear courtesy lights

Illuminate in conjunction with the front

courtesy light.

Reading lights

Operated by pressing s and t in the

courtesy lights.

Sun visor lights

Illuminates when the cover is opened.

Lighting 139

Lighting features

Centre console lighting

Spotlight incorporated in the interior

lighting comes on when headlights

are switched on.

Entry lighting

Welcome lighting

The following lights are switched on

for a short time by unlocking the

vehicle with the radio remote control:

● headlights

● tail lights

● number plate lights

● instrument panel light

● interior lights

Some functions are only operable

when it is dark outside to facilitate

locating the vehicle.

The lighting switches off immediately

when the ignition is switched on.

Starting off 3 18.

This function can be activated or

deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation.

Select the relevant setting in Settings

I Vehicle in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 121.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

The settings can be saved for the key

being used 3 25.

The following lights will additionally

switch on when the driver's door is

opened:

● illumination of some switches

● Driver Information Centre

● door pocket lights

Exit lighting

The following lights switch on if the

key is removed from the ignition

switch:

● interior lights

● instrument panel light

They will switch off automatically after

a delay. This function works only in

the dark.

Path lighting

Headlights, tail lights and number

plate lights illuminate the surrounding

area for an adjustable time after

leaving the vehicle.

Activating

Halogen headlights

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Remove the ignition key.

3. Open the driver's door.

4. Pull the indicator lever.

5. Close the driver's door.

If the driver's door is not closed, the

lights switch off after 2 minutes.

140 Lighting

Exit lighting is switched off

immediately if the indicator lever is

pulled while the driver's door is open.

LED headlights

Path lighting is activated, when the

ignition is switched off and the driver's

door is opened.

This function can be activated or

deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation.

Select the relevant setting in Settings

I Vehicle in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 121.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

The settings can be saved for the key

being used 3 25.

Battery discharge protection

Vehicle battery state of charge

function

The function guarantees longest

vehicle battery life via a generator

with controllable power output and

optimised power distribution.

To prevent discharge of the vehicle

battery when driving, the following

systems are reduced automatically in

two stages and finally switched off:

● auxiliary heater

● heated rear window and mirrors

● heated steering wheel

● heated mirrors

● heated seats

● fan

In the second stage, a message

which confirms the activation of the

vehicle battery discharge protection

will be displayed in the Driver

Information Centre.

Switching off electric lights

To prevent discharge of the vehicle

battery when the ignition is switched

off, some interior lights are switched

off automatically after some time.

Climate control 141

Climate control

Climate control systems ............. 141

Air conditioning system ........... 141

Electronic climate control

system .................................... 143

Auxiliary heater ........................ 149

Air vents ..................................... 149

Adjustable air vents ................. 149

Fixed air vents ......................... 149

Maintenance .............................. 150

Air intake ................................. 150

Air conditioning regular

operation ................................ 150

Service .................................... 150

Climate control systems

Air conditioning system

Illustration shows functions which

may not be available for your

particular vehicle.

Controls for:

● Fan speed E

● Temperature

● Air distribution §,x and y

● Air conditioning A/C

● Demisting and defrosting %

● Air recirculation n

● Heated rear window and exterior

mirrors f

●Heated seats ß

Heated rear window Ü 3 45.

Heated exterior mirrors Ü 3 41.

Heated seats ß 3 56.

Ventilated seats A 3 56.

Heated steering wheel A 3 93.

Cooling A/C

Press A/C to switch on cooling.

Activation is indicated by the LED in

the button. Cooling is only functional

when the engine is running and

climate control fan is switched on.

142 Climate control

Press A/C again to switch off cooling.

The air conditioning system cools and

dehumidifies (dries) as soon as the

outside temperature is slightly above

the freezing point. Therefore

condensation may form and drip from

under the vehicle.

If no cooling or drying is required,

switch off the cooling system for fuel

saving reasons.

Activated cooling may inhibit

Autostops.

Stop-start system 3 157.

Air recirculation system n

Press n to activate air recirculation

mode, LED is indicated.

Press n again to deactivate air

recirculation mode.

9Warning

The exchange of fresh air is

reduced in air recirculation mode.

In operation without cooling the air

humidity increases, so the

windows may mist up from inside.

The quality of the passenger

compartment air deteriorates,

which may cause the vehicle

occupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient air

conditions, the windscreen may mist

up from outside when cold air is

directed towards it. If windscreen

mists up from outside, activate

windscreen wiper and deactivate l.

Maximum cooling

Briefly open the windows so that hot

air can disperse quickly.

● Switch on cooling A/C.

● Press n for air recirculation

system on.

● Press x for air distribution.

● Set temperature control to

coldest level.

● Set fan speed to highest level.

● Open all vents.

Climate control 143

Demisting and defrosting the

windows V

●Press V: the air distribution is

directed towards the windscreen.

● Set fan speed to highest level.

● Set temperature control to

warmest level.

●Switch on heated rear window Ü.

● Open side air vents as required

and direct them towards the door

windows.

Note

If V is pressed while the engine is

running, an Autostop will be inhibited

until V is pressed again.

If l is pressed with the fan switched

on and the engine running, an

Autostop will be inhibited until l is

pressed again or until the fan is

switched off.

If V is pressed while the engine is

in an Autostop, the engine will restart

automatically.

If l is pressed with the fan switched

on while the engine is in an

Autostop, the engine will restart

automatically.

Stop-start system 3 157.

Electronic climate control

system

The dual zone climate control allows

different temperatures for driver side

and front passenger side.

In automatic mode, temperature, fan

speed and air distribution are

regulated automatically.

Illustration shows functions which

may not be available for your

particular vehicle.

Controls for:

● Rotary knob for temperature on

driver side

● Rotary knob for temperature on

passenger side

● Climate control ON/OFF

● Heated windscreen 9

● Air conditioning A/C

● Manual air recirculation n

● Air distribution w, u andv

● Demisting and defrosting $

144 Climate control

● Heated rear window and exterior

mirrors f

● Dual zone temperature

synchronisation SYNC

● Heated seats q

● Fan speed increasey and

decreasex

● Ventilated seats r

● Steering wheel heating Z

● Automatic mode AUTO

Heated rear window f 3 45.

Heated exterior mirrors Ü 3 41.

Heated seats q 3 56.

Ventilated seats r 3 56.

Heated steering wheel Z 3 93.

Each change of settings is shown in

the Info Display for a few seconds.

The electronic climate control system

is only fully operational when the

engine is running.

Automatic mode AUTO

Basic settings for automatic control

with maximum comfort:

● Press AUTO, the air distribution

and fan speed are regulated

automatically.

● Open all air vents to allow

optimised air distribution in

automatic mode.

Climate control 145

● Press A/C to switch on optimal

cooling and demisting. The LED

in the button illuminates to

indicate activation.

● Set the preselected

temperatures for driver and front

passenger using the left and right

rotary knob. Recommended

temperature is 22 °C.

The fan speed regulation in automatic

mode can be changed in the Settings

menu.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Temperature preselection

Set temperatures to the desired

value. The knob on the passenger

side changes the temperature for the

passenger side.The knob on the

driver's side changes the temperature

for the driver's side or for both sides

depending on activation of

synchronisation SYNC.

The selected temperature is indicated

in the display of the knob.

If the minimum temperature Lo is set,

the climate control system runs at

maximum cooling, if cooling A/C is

switched on.

If the maximum temperature Hi is set,

the climate control system runs at

maximum heating.

Note

If A/C is switched on, reducing the

set cabin temperature can cause the

engine to restart from an Autostop or

inhibit an Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 157.

Dual zone temperature

synchronisation SYNC

Press SYNC to link passenger side

temperature setting to the driver side.

The LED in the button illuminates to

indicate activation.

When passenger side settings will be

adjusted, synchronisation is

deactivated and the LED

extinguishes.

146 Climate control

Demisting and defrosting the

windows $

● Press $. The LED in the button

illuminates to indicate activation.

● Temperature and air distribution

are set automatically and the fan

runs at high speed.

● Switch on heated rear window

● Switch on heated windscreen

9 if available.

● To return to previous mode:

press $, to return to automatic

mode: press AUTO.

Settings of automatic rear window

heating can be changed in the

Settings menu in the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Note

If V is pressed while the engine is

running, an Autostop will be inhibited

until V is pressed again.

If l is pressed with the fan switched

on and the engine running, an

Autostop will be inhibited until l is

pressed again or until the fan is

switched off.

If V is pressed while the engine is

in an Autostop, the engine will restart

automatically.

If l is pressed with the fan switched

on while the engine is in an

Autostop, the engine will restart

automatically.

Stop-start system 3 157.

Deactivation or activation of

Electronic climate control system

ON/OFF

Cooling, fan and automatic mode can

be switched off by pressing ON/OFF.

When the system is deactivated, the

LED in the button ON/OFF is not

illuminated.

Activation by pressing ON/OFF

again, A/C or AUTO. The LED in the

button illuminates to indicate

activation.

Climate control 147

Version with heated

windscreen 9

If the vehicle is equipped with heated

windscreen, button ON/OFF is

replaced by button 9.

Climate control system will then

switched off by the left y. Switch on

by pressing right y.

Manual settings

Climate control system settings can

be changed by activating the buttons

and rotary knobs as described below.

Changing a setting will deactivate the

automatic mode.

Fan speed y

Press left y to decrease or right y

to increase fan speed. The fan speed

is indicated by the number of LEDs in

the button.

Pressing the left y for longer: fan and

cooling are switched off.

Pressing the right y for longer: the

fan runs at maximum speed.

To return to automatic mode: Press

AUTO.

Air distribution w, u, v

Press the appropriate button for the

desired adjustment. The LED in the

button illuminates to indicate

activation.

w: to windscreen and front door

windows (air conditioning is

activated in the background to

help preventing windows from

fogging)

u: to head area and rear seats via

adjustable air vents

v: to front and rear foot well and

windscreen

All combinations are possible.

148 Climate control

Return to automatic air distribution:

press AUTO.

Cooling A/C

Press A/C to switch on cooling. The

LED in the button illuminates to

indicate activation. Cooling is only

functional when the engine is running

and climate control fan is switched on.

Press A/C again to switch off cooling.

The air conditioning system cools and

dehumidifies (dries) when outside

temperature is above a specific level.

Therefore condensation may form

and drip from under the vehicle.

If no cooling or drying is required,

switch off the cooling system for fuel

saving reasons.

When the cooling system is switched

off, no engine restart will be

requested by the climate control

system during an Autostop.

Exception: defrost system is activated

and outside temperature above 0 °C

requests a restart.

Stop-start system 3 157.

The display will indicate A/C ON when

cooling is activated or A/C OFF when

the cooling is deactivated.

Manual air recirculation n

Press n to activate the air

recirculation mode. The LED in the

button illuminates to indicate

activation.

Press n again to deactivate

recirculation mode.

9Warning

The exchange of fresh air is

reduced in air recirculation mode.

In operation without cooling the air

humidity increases, so the

windows may mist up from inside.

The quality of the passenger

compartment air deteriorates,

which may cause the vehicle

occupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient air

conditions, the windscreen may mist

up from outside, when cold air is

directed towards it. If windscreen

mists up from outside, activate

windscreen wiper and deactivate w.

Climate control 149

Automatic air recirculation

An air humidity sensor switches

automatically to external air if internal

air humidity is too high.

Basic settings

Some settings can be changed in the

Settings menu in the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Auxiliary heater

Air heater

Quickheat is an electric auxiliary air

heater which automatically warms up

the passenger compartment more

quickly.

Air vents

Adjustable air vents

At least one air vent must be open

while cooling is on.

To open the vent, turn the adjuster

wheel towards the bigger W symbol.

Adjust the air amount at the vent

outlet by turning the adjuster wheel.

Direct the flow of air by tilting and

swivelling the slats.

To close the vent, turn the adjuster

wheel towards the smaller W symbol.

9Warning

Do not attach any objects to the

slats of the air vents. Risk of

damage and injury in case of an

accident.

Fixed air vents

Additional air vents are located

beneath the windscreen and door

windows and in the foot wells.

150 Climate control

Maintenance

Air intake

The air intake in front of the

windscreen in the engine

compartment must be kept clear to

allow air intake. Remove any leaves,

dirt or snow.

Air conditioning regular

operation

In order to ensure continuously

efficient performance, cooling must

be operated for a few minutes once a

month, irrespective of the weather

and time of year. Operation with

cooling is not possible when the

outside temperature is too low.

Service

For optimal cooling performance, it is

recommended to annually check the

climate control system, starting

three years after initial vehicle

registration, including:

● functionality and pressure test

● heating functionality

● leakage check

● check of drive belts

● cleaning of condenser and

evaporator drainage

● performance check

Driving and operating 151

Driving and

operating

Driving hints ............................... 152

Control of the vehicle ............... 152

Steering ................................... 152

Starting and operating ............... 152

New vehicle running-in ............ 152

Ignition switch positions ........... 152

Power button ........................... 153

Retained power off .................. 155

Starting the engine .................. 155

Overrun cut-off ........................ 157

Stop-start system .................... 157

Parking .................................... 160

Engine exhaust .......................... 161

Exhaust filter ............................ 161

Catalytic converter ................... 163

AdBlue ..................................... 163

Automatic transmission .............. 166

Transmission display ............... 166

Gear selection ......................... 167

Manual mode ........................... 168

Electronic driving programmes 168

Fault ........................................ 168

Interruption of power supply .... 169

Manual transmission .................. 169

Brakes ........................................ 170

Antilock brake system ............. 170

Parking brake .......................... 171

Brake assist ............................. 172

Hill start assist ......................... 172

Ride control systems ................. 173

Traction Control system .......... 173

Electronic Stability Control ...... 174

Driver assistance systems ......... 176

Cruise control .......................... 176

Speed limiter ........................... 177

Adaptive cruise control ............ 179

Forward collision alert ............. 187

Following distance indication ... 189

Active emergency braking ....... 190

Front pedestrian protection ..... 193

Parking assist .......................... 195

Side blind spot alert ................. 203

Rear view camera ................... 204

Traffic sign assistant ................ 206

Lane keep assist ..................... 210

Fuel ............................................ 212

Fuel for petrol engines ............. 212

Fuel for diesel engines ............ 214

Refuelling ................................ 214

Trailer hitch ................................ 216

General information ................. 216

Driving characteristics and

towing tips .............................. 217

Trailer towing ........................... 217

Towing equipment ................... 218

Trailer stability assist ............... 221

152 Driving and operating

Driving hints

Control of the vehicle

Never coast with engine not

running

Many systems will not function in this

situation (e.g. brake servo unit, power

steering). Driving in this manner is a

danger to yourself and others.

All systems function during an

Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 157.

Idle boost

If charging of the vehicle battery is

required due to battery condition, the

power output of the generator must

be increased. This will be achieved by

an idle boost which may be audible.

A message appears in the Driver

Information Centre.

Pedals

To ensure the pedal travel is

uninhibited, there must be no mats in

the area of the pedals.

Use only floor mats, which fit properly

and are fixed by the retainers on the

driver side.

Steering

If power steering assist is lost

because the engine stops or due to a

system malfunction, the vehicle can

be steered but may require increased

effort.

Starting and operating

New vehicle running-in

Do not brake unnecessarily hard for

the first few journeys.

During the first drive, smoke may

occur because of wax and oil

evaporating off the exhaust system.

Park the vehicle in the open for a

while after the first drive and avoid

inhaling the fumes.

During the running-in period, fuel and

engine oil consumption may be

higher.

Additionally, the cleaning process of

the exhaust filter may take place more

often.

Exhaust filter 3 161.

Ignition switch positions

Turn key:

Driving and operating 153

0: ignition off: Some functions

remain active until key is

removed or driver's door is

opened, provided the ignition was

on previously

1: accessory power mode: Steering

wheel lock released, some

electrical functions are operable,

ignition is off

2: ignition on power mode: Ignition

is on, diesel engine is preheating.

Control indicators illuminate and

most electrical functions are

operable. To turn the key from

position 2 to 1 or 0, first push the

key all the way in towards the

steering column.

3: engine start: Release key after

starting procedure begins

Steering wheel lock

Remove key from ignition switch and

turn steering wheel until it engages.

9Danger

Never remove the key from

ignition switch during driving as

this will cause steering wheel lock.

Power button

Electronic key must be inside the

vehicle.

Accessory power mode

Press Engine Start/Stop once without

operating clutch or brake pedal. The

yellow LED in the button illuminates.

Steering wheel lock is released and

some electrical functions are

operable, ignition is off.

Ignition on power mode

Press and hold Engine Start/Stop for

6 seconds without operating clutch or

brake pedal. The green LED in the

button illuminates, diesel engine is

154 Driving and operating

preheating. Control indicators

illuminate and most electrical

functions are operable.

Engine start

Press Engine Start/Stop briefly while:

● manual transmission: operating

clutch pedal,

● automatic transmission:

operating brake pedal with

selector lever in P or N.

Starting the engine 3 155.

Ignition off

Press Engine Start/Stop briefly when

Autostop is activated or when engine

is running and vehicle is stationary.

Automatic transmission: apply the

parking brake and engage P.

Press Engine Start/Stop briefly

without operating clutch or brake

pedal when in ignition on power

mode.

Some functions remain active until

driver's door is opened, provided the

ignition was on previously.

Emergency shut off during driving

Press Engine Start/Stop for longer

than 2 seconds or press twice briefly

within 5 seconds 3 155.

Steering wheel lock

The steering wheel lock activates

automatically when:

● The vehicle is stationary.

● The ignition has been switched

off.

● The driver's door is opened.

To release steering wheel lock, open

and close driver's door and switch on

accessory mode or start the engine

directly.

9Warning

If the vehicle battery is discharged,

the vehicle must not be towed,

tow-started or jump-started as the

steering wheel lock cannot be

disengaged.

Operation on vehicles with

electronic key system in case of

failure

If either the electronic key fails or the

battery of the electronic key is weak,

the Driver Information Centre may

display No Remote Detected or

Replace Battery in Remote Key when

you try to start the vehicle.

Place the electronic key solely

centred in the transmitter area in

longitudinal direction flat with buttons

upside as shown in the illustration.

Illustrations show different versions.

Driving and operating 155

Other objects, e.g. other keys,

transponder, tags, coins etc. must be

removed from the centre console.

Depress the clutch pedal (manual

transmission) or the brake pedal

(automatic transmission) and press

Engine Start/Stop.

To switch off the engine, press

Engine Start/Stop again. Remove the

electronic key from the centre

console.

This option is intended for

emergencies only. Replace the

electronic key battery as soon as

possible 3 23.

For unlocking or locking the doors,

see fault in radio remote control unit

or electronic key system 3 25.

Retained power off

The following electronic systems can

work until the driver's door is opened

or for ten minutes after the ignition is

switched off:

● power windows

● sunroof

● power outlets

Starting the engine

Vehicles with ignition switch

Turn key to position 1 to release the

steering wheel lock.

Manual transmission: operate clutch

and brake pedal.

Automatic transmission: operate

brake pedal and move selector lever

to P or N.

Do not operate accelerator pedal.

Diesel engines: turn the key to

position 2 for preheating and wait until

control indicator ! extinguishes.

156 Driving and operating

Turn key briefly to position 3 and

release: an automatic procedure

operates the starter with a short delay

until the engine is running, see

Automatic Starter Control.

Manual transmission: during an

Autostop, the engine can be started

by depressing the clutch pedal

3 157.

Automatic transmission: during an

Autostop, the engine can be started

by releasing the brake pedal 3 157.

Vehicles with power button

Manual transmission: operate clutch

and brake pedal.

Automatic transmission: operate

brake pedal and move selector lever

to P or N.

Do not operate accelerator pedal.

Press Engine Start/Stop briefly: an

automatic procedure operates the

starter with a short delay until the

engine is running, see automatic

starter control.

To switch off the engine when vehicle

is stationary, press

Engine Start/Stop briefly. Automatic

transmission: apply the parking brake

and engage P.

To start the engine during an

Autostop:

● Manual transmission: during an

Autostop, the engine can be

started by depressing the clutch

pedal 3 157.

● Automatic transmission: during

an Autostop, the engine can be

started by releasing the brake

pedal 3 157.

Emergency engine shut off during

driving

If the engine needs to be switched off

during driving in case of emergency,

press Engine Start/Stop for longer

than 2 seconds or press twice briefly

within 5 seconds.

9Danger

Switching off the engine during

driving may cause loss of power

support for brake and steering

systems. Assistance systems and

airbag systems are disabled.

Lighting and brake lights will

extinguish. Therefore power down

the engine and ignition while

driving only when required in case

of emergency.

Driving and operating 157

Starting the vehicle at low

temperatures

Starting the engine without additional

heaters is possible down to -25 °С for

diesel engines and -30 °C for petrol

engines. Required is an engine oil

with the correct viscosity, the correct

fuel, performed services and a

sufficiently charged vehicle battery.

With temperatures below -30 °C the

automatic transmission requires a

warming phase of approx. 5 minutes.

The selector lever must be in position

Automatic starter control

This function controls the engine

starting procedure. The driver does

not need to hold the key in position 3

or to hold Engine Start/Stop pressed.

Once applied, the system will go on

starting automatically until the engine

is running. Because of the checking

procedure, the engine starts running

after a short delay.

Possible reasons for a non-starting

engine:

● clutch pedal not operated

(manual transmission)

● brake pedal not operated or

selector lever not in P or N

(automatic transmission)

● timeout occurred

Turbo engine warm-up

Upon start-up, engine available

torque may be limited for a short time,

especially when the engine

temperature is cold. The limitation is

to allow the lubrication system to fully

protect the engine.

Overrun cut-off

The fuel supply is automatically cut off

during overrun, i.e. when the vehicle

is driven with a gear engaged but

accelerator pedal is released.

Depending on driving conditions, the

overrun cut-off may be deactivated.

Stop-start system

The stop-start system helps to save

fuel and to reduce the exhaust

emissions. When conditions allow, it

switches off the engine as soon as the

vehicle is at a low speed or at a

standstill, e.g. at a traffic light or in a

traffic jam. The ignition stays on.

The engine switches on automatically

when certain conditions apply or

restart is activated by a driver.

Activation

The stop-start system is available as

soon as the engine is started, the

vehicle starts-off and the conditions

as stated below in this section are

fulfilled.

158 Driving and operating

Deactivation

Deactivate the stop-start system

manually by pressing D. The

deactivation is indicated when the

LED in the button illuminates.

Autostop

Vehicles with manual transmission

Depending on the engine, two

versions of an Autostop are available.

See engine data to identify the engine

identifier code for your vehicle

3 280.

Conventional Autostop

An Autostop can be activated at a

speed lower than 5 km/h.

Activate a conventional Autostop as

follows:

● Depress the clutch pedal.

● Set the lever in neutral.

● Release the clutch pedal.

Early Autostop

An Autostop can be activated at a

speed lower than 14 km/h.

Early Autostop is inhibited if the

incline is greater than 5%.

Activate an early Autostop as follows:

● Depress the brake pedal

sufficiently.

● Depress the clutch pedal.

The engine will be switched off while

the ignition stays on.

Early Autostop is inhibited when the

turn lights are on, trailer hitch is

connected, the steering wheel is

moved beyond a certain point or the

inclines is greater than 5%.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

If the vehicle is at a standstill with

depressed brake pedal, Autostop is

activated automatically.

Indication

An Autostop is indicated by the

needle at the AUTOSTOP position in

the tachometer.

After restart, the idle speed is

indicated.

During an Autostop, the heating and

brake performance will be

maintained.

Conditions for an Autostop

The stop-start system checks if each

of the following conditions is fulfilled:

● The stop-start system is not

manually deactivated.

● The bonnet is fully closed.

Driving and operating 159

● The driver's door is closed or the

driver's seat belt is fastened.

● The vehicle battery is sufficiently

charged and in good condition.

● The engine is warmed up.

● The engine coolant temperature

is not too high.

● The engine exhaust temperature

is not too high, e.g. after driving

with high engine load.

● The ambient temperature is

above -5 °C.

● The brake vacuum is sufficient.

● Between the last restart and a

new Autostop must be about

10 seconds.

● The self-cleaning function of the

exhaust filter is not active.

● The vehicle was driven at least at

walking speed since the last

Autostop.

Otherwise an Autostop will be

inhibited.

The stop-start system will be

deactivated on inclines of 12% or

more.

Certain settings of the climate control

system may inhibit an Autostop. See

Climate control chapter for more

details 3 141.

Immediately after motorway driving

an Autostop may be inhibited.

New vehicle running-in 3 152.

Vehicle battery discharge protection

To ensure reliable engine restarts,

several vehicle battery discharge

protection features are implemented

as part of the stop-start system.

Power saving measures

During an Autostop, several electrical

features e.g. auxiliary electric heater

or heated rear window are disabled or

switched to a power saving mode.

The fan speed of the climate control

system is reduced to save power.

Restart of the engine by the driver

Vehicles with manual transmission

Depending on the engine, two

versions of a restart are available.

See engine data to identify the engine

identifier code for your vehicle

3 280.

Conventional restart

Depress the clutch pedal to restart the

engine. For engines with late restart,

this is only possible without

depressing the brake pedal.

Late restart

● Depress the brake pedal.

● Depress the clutch pedal.

● Select first gear.

● Release the brake pedal to

restart the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Release the brake pedal or move

selector lever out of D into N or P to

restart the engine.

Restart of the engine by the stop-

start system

On vehicles with manual transmission

which are in a conventional Autostop,

the selector lever must be in neutral

to enable an automatic restart.

On vehicles with manual transmission

which are in an early Autostop, an

automatic restart is possible, when

not in neutral if the brake pedal and

the clutch pedal are depressed.

160 Driving and operating

On vehicles with automatic

transmission, the selector lever must

be in D to enable an automatic restart.

The engine will be restarted

automatically by the stop-start

system, if one of the following

conditions occurs during an Autostop:

● The stop-start system is

manually deactivated.

● The bonnet is opened.

● The driver's seat belt is

unfastened and / or the driver's

door is opened.

● The engine temperature is too

low.

● The charging level of the vehicle

battery is below a defined level.

● The brake vacuum is not

sufficient.

● The vehicle is driven at least at

walking speed.

● The climate control system

requests an engine start.

● The desired compartment

temperature does not match the

actual temperature.

● The air conditioning is manually

switched on.

If the bonnet is not fully closed, a

warning message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

If an electrical accessory, e.g. a

portable CD player, is connected to

the power outlet, a brief power drop

during the restart might be noticeable.

Note

If a trailer or a bike carrier is

attached, early Autostop and late

restart is deactivated.

Parking

9Warning

● Do not park the vehicle on an

easily ignitable surface. The

high temperature of the

exhaust system could ignite the

surface.

● Always apply the parking

brake. Activate the manual

parking brake without pressing

the release button. Apply as

firmly as possible on a downhill

slope or uphill slope. Depress

brake pedal at the same time to

reduce operating force.

For vehicles with electric

parking brake, pull switch m for

a minimum of 1 second until

control indicator m illuminates

constantly and electric parking

brake is applied 3 110.

● Switch off the engine.

● If the vehicle is on a level

surface or uphill slope, engage

first gear or set the selector

lever to position P before

removing the ignition key or

switching off ignition on

vehicles with power button. On

an uphill slope, turn the front

wheels away from the kerb.

If the vehicle is on a downhill

slope, engage reverse gear or

set the selector lever to position

P before removing the ignition

key or switching off ignition on

Driving and operating 161

vehicles with power button.

Turn the front wheels towards

the kerb.

● Close the windows and the

sunroof.

● Remove the ignition key from

the ignition switch or switch off

ignition on vehicles with power

button. Turn the steering wheel

until the steering wheel lock is

felt to engage.

For vehicles with automatic

transmission, the key can only

be removed when the selector

lever is in position P.

● Lock the vehicle by pressing the

button on the door handle or the

button e on the remote control.

● Activate the anti-theft alarm

system.

● The engine cooling fans may run

after the engine has been

switched off 3 224.

Caution

After running at high engine

speeds or with high engine loads,

operate the engine briefly at a low

load or run in neutral for

approx. 30 seconds before

switching off, in order to protect

the turbocharger.

Note

In the event of an accident with

airbag deployment, the engine is

switched off automatically if the

vehicle comes to a standstill within a

certain time.

In countries with extreme cold

temperatures it may be necessary to

park the vehicle without applied

parking brake. Make sure to park the

vehicle on a level surface.

Engine exhaust

9Danger

Engine exhaust gases contain

poisonous carbon monoxide,

which is colourless and odourless

and could be fatal if inhaled.

If exhaust gases enter the interior

of the vehicle, open the windows.

Have the cause of the fault

rectified by a workshop.

Avoid driving with an open load

compartment, otherwise exhaust

gases could enter the vehicle.

Exhaust filter

The exhaust filter is a particle filter for

diesel and petrol engines.

162 Driving and operating

Automatic cleaning process

The exhaust filter system filters soot

particles out of the exhaust gases.

The system includes a self-cleaning

function that runs automatically

during driving without any notification.

The filter is cleaned by periodically

burning off the soot particles at high

temperature. This process takes

place automatically under set driving

conditions and may take up to

25 minutes. Typically it needs

between 7 and 12 minutes. Autostop

is not available and fuel consumption

may be higher during this period. The

emission of smells and smoke during

this process is normal.

System requires cleaning

Under certain conditions, e.g. driving

short distances, the system cannot

clean itself automatically.

If cleaning of the filter is required and

if previous driving conditions did not

enable automatic cleaning, it will be

indicated by a warning message in

the Driver Information Centre.

A warning message appears when

exhaust filter is full. Start cleaning

process as soon as possible.

A warning message also appears

when exhaust filter has reached the

maximum filling level. Start cleaning

process immediately to avoid

damage to the engine.

Activate self-cleaning process

Cleaning process is completed more

quickly at high engine speeds and

loads. Therefore, drive in lower gears

than normal, and use manual gear

selection on vehicles with automatic

transmission. Usage of electrical

consumers like air conditioning and

heated windows to increase engine

load supports cleaning process.

Caution

If possible, do not interrupt

cleaning process. Drive until

cleaning is completed to avoid the

need for service or repair by a

workshop.

Vehicles with petrol engine

To activate cleaning process,

continue driving, keep engine speed

above 2500 rpm. Shift down if

necessary.

Drive dynamically at different engine

speeds. Use engine brake for

deceleration, if possible.

Keep on driving until self-cleaning

operation is complete and the display

message disappears.

Vehicles with diesel engine

To activate cleaning process,

continue driving, keep engine speed

above 2000 rpm, ideally and

continuously around 2500 rpm. Shift

down if necessary.

Keep on driving until self-cleaning

operation is complete and the display

message disappears.

Driving and operating 163

Cleaning process not possible

If cleaning is not possible for any

reason, control indicator Z

illuminates and a warning message

appears in the Driver Information

Centre. Engine power may be

reduced. Seek the assistance of a

workshop immediately.

Catalytic converter

The catalytic converter reduces the

amount of harmful substances in the

exhaust gases.

Caution

Fuel grades other than those listed

on pages 3 212, 3 280 could

damage the catalytic converter or

electronic components.

Unburnt petrol will overheat and

damage the catalytic converter.

Therefore avoid excessive use of

the starter, running the fuel tank

dry and starting the engine by

pushing or towing.

In the event of misfiring, uneven

engine running, a reduction in engine

performance or other unusual

problems, have the cause of the fault

rectified by a workshop as soon as

possible. In an emergency, driving

can be continued for a short period,

keeping vehicle speed and engine

speed low.

AdBlue

General information

The selective catalytic reduction

(BlueInjection) is a method to

substantially reduce the nitrogen

oxides in the exhaust emission. This

is achieved by injecting a Diesel

Exhaust Fluid (DEF) into the exhaust

system. The ammonia released by

the fluid reacts with nitrous gases

(NOx) from the exhaust and turns it

into nitrogen and water.

The designation of this fluid is

AdBlue®. It is a non-toxic, non-

flammable, colourless and odourless

fluid which consists of 32% urea and

68% water.

9Warning

Avoid contact of your eyes or skin

with AdBlue.

In case of eye or skin contact,

rinse off with water.

Caution

Avoid contact of the paintwork with

AdBlue.

In case of contact, rinse off with

water.

AdBlue freezes at a temperature of

approx. -11 °C. As the vehicle is

equipped with an AdBlue pre-heater,

the emissions reduction at low

temperatures is ensured. The AdBlue

pre-heater works automatically.

164 Driving and operating

Note

Frozen and again liquefied AdBlue is

usable without quality loss.

The typical AdBlue consumption is

approx. two litres per 1000 km, but

can also be higher depending on

driving behaviour (e.g. high load or

towing).

AdBlue tank

The AdBlue tank level can be found in

the display menu.

Level warnings

Depending on the calculated range of

AdBlue, different messages are

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre. The messages and the

restrictions are a legal requirement.

The first possible warning is AdBlue

Range: 2400 km.

This warning will show up once briefly

with the calculated range. Driving is

possible without any restrictions.

The next warning level is entered with

a range below 1750 km. The

message with the current range will

always be displayed when ignition is

switched on and needs to be

confirmed 3 115. Refill AdBlue before

entering the next warning level.

At an AdBlue range below 900 km,

the following warning messages are

alternately displayed and cannot be

dismissed:

●AdBlue Low Refill Now

●Engine Restart Prevented in 900

Additionally, control indicator Y

flashes continuously.

Note

In case of high AdBlue consumption,

the Driver Information Centre may

display this warning without the

previous warning stages.

The last warning level is entered

when the AdBlue tank is empty.

Restart of the engine is not possible.

The following warning messages are

alternately displayed and cannot be

dismissed:

●AdBlue Empty Refill Now

●Engine Will Not Restart

Additionally, control indicator Y

flashes continuously.

With active prevention of an engine

start, the following message will be

displayed:

Refill AdBlue To Start Vehicle.

The tank must be refilled completely

with AdBlue, otherwise restarting of

the engine is not possible 3 283.

High emission warnings

If the exhaust emission rises above a

certain value, warnings similar to the

range warnings will be displayed in

the Driver Information Centre.

Requests to have the exhaust system

checked and finally the

announcement of the prevention of

an engine restart are displayed.

These restrictions are a legal

requirement.

Consult a workshop for assistance.

Driving and operating 165

Refilling AdBlue

Caution

Only use AdBlue that complies

with European standards

DIN 70 070 and ISO 22241-1.

Do not use additives.

Do not dilute AdBlue.

Otherwise the selective catalytic

reduction system could be

damaged.

Note

Whenever a filling pump with a

nozzle for passenger cars is not

available at a filling station, use only

AdBlue bottles or canisters with a

sealed refill adapter for refilling, to

prevent splashback and overspill,

and in order to ensure that the fumes

from the tank are captured and do

not emerge. AdBlue in bottles or

canisters is available in many filling

stations and can be purchased e.g.

at Opel dealers and other retail

outlets.

Since AdBlue has a limited

durability, check the date of expiry

before refilling.

Note

When unscrewing the protective cap

from the filler neck, ammonia fumes

may emerge. Do not inhale as the

fumes have a pungent smell. The

fumes are not harmful by inhalation.

The AdBlue tank should be filled

completely. This must be done if the

warning message regarding

prevention of an engine restart is

already displayed.

The vehicle must be parked on a level

surface.

The filler neck for AdBlue is located

behind the fuel filler flap, which is

located at right rear side of the

vehicle.

The fuel filler flap can only be opened

if the vehicle is unlocked.

1. Remove key from ignition switch.

2. Close all doors to avoid ammonia

fumes entering the interior of the

vehicle.

3. Release the fuel filler flap by

pushing the flap 3 214.

4. Unscrew protective cap from the

filler neck.

5. Open AdBlue canister.

6. Mount one end of the hose on the

canister and screw the other end

on the filler neck.

7. Lift the canister until it is empty, or

until the flow from the canister has

stopped. This can take up to

5 minutes.

8. Place the canister on the ground

to empty the hose, wait

15 seconds.

166 Driving and operating

9. Unscrew the hose from the filler

neck.

10. Mount the protective cap and turn

clockwise until it engages.

Note

Dispose of AdBlue canister

according to environmental

requirements. To reuse the hose

flush it with clear water after usage.

Automatic transmission

The automatic transmission permits

automatic gearshifting (automatic

mode) or manual gearshifting

(manual mode).

Manual shifting is possible in manual

mode by tapping the selector lever to

+ or - 3 168.

Continuous variable transmission

The engine speed is always within the

ideal fuel consumption range. When

selector level is in D and high power

is requiered, the electronic

transmission control changes from

stepless operation to a seven step

automatic shifting.

Transmission display

The mode or selected gear is shown

in the Driver Information Centre.

In automatic mode, the driving

programme is indicated by D.

In manual mode, M and the number

of the selected gear is indicated.

R indicates reverse gear.

N indicates neutral position.

P indicates park position.

Driving and operating 167

Gear selection

P: park position, wheels are locked,

engage only when the vehicle is

stationary

R: reverse gear, engage only when

the vehicle is stationary

N: neutral

D: automatic mode

M: manual mode

<: upshift in manual mode

]: downshift in manual mode

The selector lever is locked in P and

can only be moved when the ignition

is on, the release button on the

selector lever is pushed and the brake

pedal is applied.

Without brake pedal applied, control

indicator j illuminates.

If the selector lever is not in P when

the ignition is switched off, control

indicator j flashes.

To engage P or R, press the release

button.

The engine can only be started with

the lever in position P or N. When

position N is selected, press the brake

pedal or apply the parking brake

before starting.

Do not accelerate while engaging a

gear. Never depress the accelerator

pedal and brake pedal at the same

time.

When a gear is engaged, the vehicle

slowly begins to creep when the

brake is released.

Engine braking

To utilise the engine braking effect,

select a lower gear in good time when

driving downhill, see manual mode.

Rocking the vehicle

Rocking the vehicle is only

permissible if the vehicle is stuck in

sand, mud or snow. Move the selector

lever between D and R in a repeat

pattern. Do not race the engine and

avoid sudden acceleration.

168 Driving and operating

Parking

Apply the parking brake and engage

The ignition key can only be removed

when the selector lever is in position

Manual mode

Move selector lever out of position D

towards the left in position M.

Tap selector lever upwards + to shift

to a higher gear.

Tap the selector lever downwards - to

shift to a lower gear.

If a higher gear is selected when

vehicle speed is too low, or a lower

gear when vehicle speed is too high,

the shift is not executed. This can

cause a message in the Driver

Information Centre.

In manual mode, no automatic

shifting to a higher gear takes place

at high engine revolutions.

Gear shift indication

The symbol R or S with a number

beside it is indicated when

gearshifting is recommended for fuel

saving reasons.

Shift indication appears only in

manual mode.

Electronic driving

programmes

● Special programmes

automatically adapt the shifting

points when driving up inclines or

down hills.

● In snowy or icy conditions or on

other slippery surfaces, the

electronic transmission control

enables the driver to select

manually first, second or third

gear for starting off. Except

vehicles with continouosly

variable transmission.

Kickdown

Pressing down the accelerator pedal

beyond the kickdown detent will lead

to maximum acceleration

independent of the selected driving

mode. The transmission shifts to a

lower gear depending on engine

speed and shifts to a higher gear at

high engine revolutions.

Fault

In the event of a fault a message is

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 122.

Electronic transmission control

enables only fourth gear. The

transmission no longer shifts

automatically.

Have the cause of the fault remedied

by a workshop.

Driving and operating 169

Interruption of power supply

In the event of an interruption of

power supply, the selector lever

cannot be moved out of the P

position. The ignition key cannot be

removed from the ignition switch.

If the vehicle battery is discharged,

start the vehicle using jump leads

3 263.

If the vehicle battery is not the cause

of the fault, release the selector lever.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Release the selector lever trim

from the centre console. Poke

with a finger into the leather

socket below the selector lever

and push the trim upwards.

Rotate trim to the left.

3. Insert a small stick (e.g. a pen or

screw driver) into the opening

near the selector lever. Push

down the stick vertically and move

the selector lever out of P. If this

position is engaged again, the

selector lever will be locked again.

Have the cause of the power

supply interruption remedied by a

workshop.

4. Mount the selector lever trim onto

the centre console and refit.

Manual transmission

To engage reverse, depress the

clutch pedal and then press the

release button on the selector lever

and engage the gear.

If the gear does not engage, set the

lever to neutral, release the clutch

pedal and depress again; then repeat

gear selection.

Do not slip the clutch unnecessarily.

When operating, depress the clutch

pedal completely. Do not use the

pedal as a foot rest.

170 Driving and operating

When clutch slip is detected for a

specific time, the engine power will be

reduced. A warning is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre. Release

the clutch.

Caution

It is not advisable to drive with the

hand resting on the selector lever.

Gear shift indication 3 111.

Stop-start system 3 157.

Brakes

The brake system comprises two

independent brake circuits.

If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle can

still be braked using the other brake

circuit. However, braking effect is

achieved only when the brake pedal

is depressed firmly. Considerably

more force is needed for this. The

braking distance is extended. Seek

the assistance of a workshop before

continuing the journey.

When the engine is not running, the

support of the brake servo unit

disappears once the brake pedal has

been depressed once or twice.

Braking effect is not reduced, but

braking requires significantly greater

force. It is especially important to bear

this in mind when being towed.

Control indicator R 3 110.

Antilock brake system

Antilock brake system (ABS)

prevents the wheels from locking.

ABS starts to regulate brake pressure

as soon as a wheel shows a tendency

to lock. The vehicle remains

steerable, even during hard braking.

ABS control is made apparent

through a pulse in the brake pedal

and the noise of the regulation

process.

For optimum braking, keep the brake

pedal fully depressed throughout the

braking process, despite the fact that

the pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce

the pressure on the pedal.

After starting off, the system performs

a self-test which may be audible.

Control indicator u 3 111.

Adaptive brake light

During full braking, all three brake

lights flash for the duration of ABS

control.

Driving and operating 171

Fault

9Warning

If there is a fault in the ABS, the

wheels may be liable to lock due

to braking that is heavier than

normal. The advantages of ABS

are no longer available. During

hard braking, the vehicle can no

longer be steered and may

swerve.

Have the cause of the fault remedied

by a workshop.

Parking brake

9Warning

Before leaving the vehicle, check

parking brake status. Control

indicator R (manual parking

brake) or m (electrical parking

brake) illuminate constantly when

parking brake is applied.

Manual parking brake

9Warning

Always apply parking brake firmly

without operating the release

button, and apply as firmly as

possible on a downhill or uphill

slope.

To release the parking brake, pull

the lever up slightly, press the

release button and fully lower the

lever.

To reduce the operating forces of

the parking brake, depress the

foot brake at the same time.

Control indicator R 3 110.

Electric parking brake

Applying when vehicle is stationary

Pull the switch m. If control indicator

m illuminates, electric parking brake

is applied.

The electric parking brake can always

be activated, even if the ignition is off.

Do not operate electric parking brake

system too often without engine

running as this will discharge the

vehicle battery.

172 Driving and operating

Releasing

Switch on ignition. Keep foot brake

pedal depressed and then push

switch m. If control indicator m

extinguishes, electric parking brake is

released.

Drive away function

Vehicles with manual transmission:

Depressing the clutch pedal and then

slightly releasing the clutch pedal and

slightly depressing the accelerator

pedal releases the electric parking

brake automatically. This is not

possible when switch m is pulled at

the same time.

Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Engaging D and then depressing the

accelerator pedal releases the

electric parking brake automatically.

This is not possible when switch m is

pulled at the same time.

Dynamic braking when vehicle is

moving

When the vehicle is moving and the

switch m is kept pulled, the electric

parking brake system will decelerate

the vehicle, but will not apply

statically.

As soon as the switch m is released,

dynamic braking will be stopped.

Automatic applying

If the vehicle is equipped with

automatic transmission and adaptive

cruise control is active, electric

parking brake is applied automatically

when vehicle is stopped by the

system for more than 2 minutes.

Parking brake releases automatically

after moving off.

Functionality check

When the vehicle is not moving, the

electric parking brake might be

applied automatically. This is done to

check the system.

Fault

Failure mode of electric parking brake

is indicated by a control indicator j

and by a vehicle message which is

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 122.

Control indicator m flashes: electric

parking brake is not fully applied or

released. When continuously

flashing, release electric parking

brake and retry applying.

Brake assist

If brake pedal is depressed quickly

and forcefully, maximum brake force

is automatically applied.

Operation of brake assist might

become apparent by a pulse in the

brake pedal and a greater resistance

when depressing the brake pedal.

Maintain steady pressure on the

brake pedal as long as full braking is

required. Maximum brake force is

automatically reduced when brake

pedal is released.

Hill start assist

The system helps prevent unintended

movement when driving away on

inclines.

Driving and operating 173

When releasing the brake pedal after

stopping on an incline, brakes remain

on for further two seconds. The

brakes release automatically as soon

as the vehicle begins to accelerate.

Ride control systems

Traction Control system

The Traction Control system (TC) is a

component of the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC).

TC improves driving stability when

necessary, regardless of the type of

road surface or tyre grip, by

preventing the drive wheels from

spinning.

As soon as the drive wheels starts to

spin, engine output is reduced and

the wheel spinning the most is braked

individually. This considerably

improves the driving stability of the

vehicle on slippery road surfaces.

TC is operational after each engine

start as soon as the control indicator

b extinguishes.

When TC operates b flashes.

9Warning

Do not let this special safety

feature tempt you into taking risks

when driving.

Adapt speed to the road

conditions.

Control indicator b 3 111.

Deactivation

TC can be switched off when spinning

of drive wheels is required: press b

briefly.

174 Driving and operating

Control indicator k illuminates.

A status message appears in the

Driver Information Centre when TC is

deactivated.

When TC is deactivated, ESC

remains active but with higher control

threshold.

TC is reactivated by pressing b

again. A status message pops up in

the Driver Information Centre when

TC is reactivated.

TC is also reactivated the next time

the ignition is switched on.

Fault

If there is a fault in the system the

control indicator b illuminates

continuously and a message appears

in the Driver Information Centre. The

system is not operational.

Have the cause of the fault remedied

by a workshop.

Electronic Stability Control

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

improves driving stability when

necessary, regardless of the type of

road surface or tyre grip.

As soon as the vehicle starts to

swerve (understeer / oversteer),

engine output is reduced and the

wheels are braked individually.

ESC operates in combination with the

Traction Control system (TC). It

prevents the drive wheels from

spinning.

Torque distribution is a special

feature that allocates the torque to the

drive wheels before the ESC

intervenes. When cornering, the

wheels on the inner curve are braked

individually. Additionally, engine

torque will be delivered to the drive

wheel on the outer curve. This

reduces the tendency of

understeering and improves traction

when cornering fast.

ESC is operational after each engine

start as soon as the control indicator

b extinguishes.

When ESC operates b flashes.

9Warning

Do not let this special safety

feature tempt you into taking risks

when driving.

Adapt speed to the road

conditions.

Control indicator b 3 111.

Driving and operating 175

Deactivation

ESC and TC can be deactivated:

● hold b pressed for a minimum of

five seconds: ESC and TC are

both deactivated. k and n

illuminate and status messages

appear in the Driver Information

Centre.

● To deactivate only Traction

control system press button b

briefly: TC is inactive but ESC

remains active, k illuminates. A

status message appears in the

Driver Information Centre when

TC is deactivated.

ESC is reactivated by pressing the

b button again. If the TC system was

previously disabled, both TC and

ESC are reactivated. k and n

extinguishes when TC and ESC are

reactivated.

ESC is also reactivated the next time

the ignition is switched on.

Fault

If there is a fault in the system the

control indicator b illuminates

continuously and a message appears

in the Driver Information Centre. The

system is not operational.

Have the cause of the fault remedied

by a workshop.

176 Driving and operating

Driver assistance

systems

9Warning

Driver assistance systems are

developed to support the driver

and not to replace the driver's

attention.

The driver accepts full

responsibility when driving the

vehicle.

When using driver assistance

systems, always take care

regarding the current traffic

situation.

Cruise control

The cruise control can store and

maintain speeds of approx. 30 km/h

to maximum vehicle speed.

Deviations from the stored speeds

may occur when driving uphill or

downhill.

Activating in first gear is not possible.

Do not use the cruise control if it is not

advisable to maintain a constant

speed.

Illustrations show different versions.

Control indicator m 3 114.

Switching on the system

Press m; control indicator m in

instrument cluster illuminates white.

Activation of the functionality

Accelerate to the desired speed and

turn thumb wheel to SET/-, the

current speed is stored and

maintained. Control indicator m in

instrument cluster illuminates green.

On Uplevel display m illuminates

green and set speed is indicated.

Accelerator pedal can be released.

Driving and operating 177

Vehicle speed can be increased by

depressing the accelerator pedal.

When the accelerator pedal is

released, the previously stored speed

is resumed.

Cruise control remains activated

while gearshifting.

Increase speed

With cruise control active, hold thumb

wheel turned to RES/+ or briefly turn

to RES/+ repeatedly: speed

increases continuously or in small

increments.

Alternatively accelerate to the desired

speed and store by turning to SET/-.

Reduce speed

With cruise control active, hold thumb

wheel turned to SET/- or briefly turn to

SET/- repeatedly: speed decreases

continuously or in small increments.

Deactivation of the functionality

Press y; control indicator m in

instrument cluster illuminates white.

On Uplevel display m changes to

white.

Cruise control is deactivated, but not

switched off. Last stored speed

remains in memory for later speed

resume.

Automatic deactivation:

● Vehicle speed is below approx.

30 km/h.

● Vehicle speed drops more than

25 km/h below the set speed.

● The brake pedal is depressed.

● The clutch pedal is depressed for

a few seconds.

● The selector lever is in N.

● Engine speed is in a very low

range.

● The Traction Control system or

Electronic Stability Control is

operating.

● Parking brake is applied.

● Simultaneous pressing RES/+

and brake pedal deactivates

cruise control and will delete

stored speed.

Resume stored speed

Turn thumb wheel to RES/+ at a

speed above 30 km/h. The stored

speed will be obtained.

Switching off the system

Press m, control indicator m in

instrument cluster extinguishes. The

stored speed is deleted.

Pressing L to activate the speed

limiter or switching off the ignition also

switches off cruise control and

deletes the stored speed.

Speed limiter

The speed limiter prevents the

vehicle exceeding a preset maximum

speed.

178 Driving and operating

The maximum speed can be set at

speeds above 25 km/h up to

200 km/h.

The driver can only accelerate up to

the preset speed. Deviations from the

limited speed may occur when driving

downhill.

The preset speed limit is displayed in

the Driver Information Centre when

the system is active.

Activation of the functionality

Illustrations show different versions.

Press L, symbol L illuminates in the

Driver Information Centre.

If cruise control has been activated

before, it is switched off when speed

limiter is activated and the control

indicator m extinguishes.

Set speed limit

Accelerate to the desired speed and

briefly turn thumb wheel to SET/-: the

current speed is stored as maximum

speed.

On Midlevel display L and the speed

limit is displayed.

On Uplevel display L changes to

green.

Change speed limit

With speed limiter active, hold or

briefly turn thumb wheel to RES/+ to

increase or SET/- to decrease the

desired maximum speed.

Exceeding the speed limit

When exceeding the limited speed

without driver input, the speed will

flash in the Driver Information Centre

and a chime sounds during this

period.

In the event of an emergency, it is

possible to exceed the speed limit by

depressing the accelerator pedal

firmly nearly to the final point. In this

case no chime appears.

Driving and operating 179

Release the accelerator pedal and

the speed limiter function is

reactivated once a speed lower than

the limit speed is obtained.

Deactivation of the functionality

Press y: speed limiter is deactivated

and the vehicle can be driven without

speed limit.

On Midlevel display the stored limited

speed is indicated in brackets.

On Uplevel display L changes to

white.

Additionally, a corresponding

message appears.

Speed limiter is deactivated, but not

switched off. Last stored speed

remains in memory for later speed

resume.

Resume limit speed

Turn thumb wheel to RES/+. The

stored speed limit will be obtained

and is indicated without brackets in

the Driver Information Centre.

Switching off the system

Press L, the speed limit indication

extinguishes in the Driver Information

Centre. The stored speed is deleted.

By pressing m to activate cruise

control or adaptive cruise control,

speed limiter is also deactivated and

the stored speed is deleted.

By switching off the ignition, speed

limiter is also deactivated, but the

speed limit will be stored for next

speed limiter activation.

Adaptive cruise control

Adaptive cruise control is an

enhancement to conventional cruise

control with the additional feature of

maintaining a certain distance behind

the vehicle ahead.

Adaptive cruise control automatically

decelerates the vehicle when

approaching a slower moving vehicle.

It then adjusts the vehicle speed to

follow the vehicle ahead at the

selected following distance. The

vehicle speed increases or decreases

to follow the vehicle in front, but will

not exceed the set speed. It may

apply limited braking with activated

brake lights.

The adaptive cruise control can store

set speed over 30 km/h for manual

transmission. On vehicles with

automatic transmissions the system

can brake until a full stop and drive off

from a stop.

Adaptive cruise control uses radar

and camera sensors to detect the

vehicles ahead. If no vehicle is

detected in the driving path, the

adaptive cruise control will behave

like a conventional cruise control.

180 Driving and operating

For additional information including a

video, visit us online.

Adaptive cruise control is mainly

advised to be used on long straight

roads like motorways or country

roads with steady traffic. Do not use

the system if it is not advisable to

maintain a constant speed.

Control indicator A 3 114, m 3 114,

C 3 114.

9Warning

The complete driver attention is

always required while driving with

adaptive cruise control. The driver

stays fully in control of the vehicle

because the brake pedal, the

accelerator pedal and the cancel

switch have priority over any

adaptive cruise control operation.

Switching on the system

Press v to switch on adaptive cruise

control. C appears in the Driver

Information Centre.

Activation of the functionality by

setting the speed

Adaptive cruise control can be

activated at speeds above 25 km/h on

vehicles with automatic transmission

or 30 km/h on vehicles with manual

transmission. The upper speed limit is

180 km/h.

Accelerate to the desired speed and

turn thumb wheel to SET/-, the

current speed is stored and

maintained.

The adaptive cruise control symbol

C, the following distance setting and

set speed are indicated in the Driver

Information Centre.

The accelerator pedal can be

released. Adaptive cruise control

remains activated during gear

shifting.

Overriding set speed

It is always possible to drive faster

than the selected set speed by

depressing the accelerator pedal.

When the accelerator pedal is

released, the vehicle returns to the

desired distance if a slower vehicle is

ahead. Otherwise it returns to the

stored speed.

Driving and operating 181

Once the system is activated,

adaptive cruise control decelerates or

brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead,

which is slower or closer than the

desired following distance.

9Warning

Accelerating by the driver

deactivates automatic braking by

the system. This is indicated as a

pop-up warning in the Driver

Information Centre or by the

adaptive cruise control symbol

turning blue.

Take over current speed

If the accelerator pedal is pressed,

the current vehicle speed is taken

over as stored speed. This is also

valid, if the current vehicle speed is

lower than the Set Speed.

Increase or reduce speed

The preset speed can be changed by

moving thumb wheel to RES/+ to

increase or SET/- to decrease the

speed. Move thumb wheel repeatedly

to change speed in small steps, move

and hold to change speed in large

steps.

Resume stored speed

If the system is switched on but

inactive and a speed was stored

before, turn thumb wheel to RES/+ at

a speed above 5 km/h (with automatic

transmission) or above 30 km/h (with

manual transmission) to resume the

stored speed.

Full speed range adaptive cruise

control on vehicles with automatic

transmission

Full speed range adaptive cruise

control will maintain a following

distance behind a detected vehicle

and slow your vehicle to a stop behind

that vehicle.

When the vehicle ahead accelerates

after a brief stop, the adaptive cruise

control will drive off automatically

without driver action. If necessary,

press RES/+ or the accelerator pedal

to resume adaptive cruise control.

Pressing the accelerator pedal allows

more control over the acceleration

after driving off. Note that automatic

braking is disabled during usage of

the accelerator pedal.

If the stopped vehicle ahead was

stopped for a longer time and then

begins to move forward, the green

illuminated vehicle ahead control

indicator A will flash and a warning

chime will sound as a reminder to

check traffic before proceeding.

9Warning

When full speed range adaptive

cruise control is deactivated or

cancelled, the vehicle will no

longer be held at a stop and can

182 Driving and operating

start moving. Always be prepared

to manually apply the brake pedal

to hold the vehicle stationary.

Do not leave the vehicle while it is

being held at a stop by the full

speed range adaptive cruise

control. Always move selector

lever to park position P and switch

off the ignition before leaving the

vehicle.

Setting the following distance

When adaptive cruise control detects

a slower moving vehicle in the driving

path, it will adjust the vehicle speed to

maintain the following distance

selected by the driver.

The following distance can be set to

near, medium or far.

Press l, the current setting is shown

in the Driver Information Centre.

Press l again to change the

following distance. The setting is also

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

The selected following distance is

indicated by filled distance bars in the

adaptive cruise control page.

Note that the following distance

setting is shared with the sensitivity

setting of forward collision alert

3 187.

Example: If setting 3 (far) is selected,

then the driver is warned sooner

before a possible collision, also if

adaptive cruise control is inactive or

switched off.

Driving and operating 183

9Warning

The Driver accepts full

responsibility to drive with the

appropriate following distance

based on traffic, weather, visibility

and regional regulation. Following

distance must be adjusted or the

system switched off when required

by the prevailing conditions.

Detecting the vehicle ahead

The green illuminated vehicle ahead

control indicator A is displayed when

the system detects a vehicle in the

driving path. The range of the sensors

is between 25 and 150 m depending

on vehicle speed.

Forward collision alert 3 187.

If this symbol does not display, or

displays briefly, adaptive cruise

control will not respond to vehicles

ahead.

Deactivation of the functionality

Adaptive cruise control is deactivated

by the driver when:

●y is pressed.

● Brake pedal is applied.

● Clutch pedal is depressed for

more than four seconds.

● Selector lever of automatic

transmission is moved to N.

The system is also automatically

deactivated when:

● Vehicle speed accelerates above

190 km/h or slows down below

55 km/h. Vehicles with automatic

transmission slows down to a

stop without deactivating within

5 minutes.

● The Traction Control system is

deactivated or operating.

● The Electronic Stability Control is

deactivated or operating.

● There is no traffic and nothing

detected on the road sides for

approx. 1 minute. In this case

there are no radar echoes and

the sensor may report that it is

blocked.

● The active emergency braking

system is applying the brakes.

● Driving on steep inclines.

● The radar sensor is blocked by

an ice or water film.

● A fault is detected in the radar,

camera, engine or brake system.

● The brakes need to cool down.

Additionally, the system is

automatically deactivated on vehicles

with automatic transmission (full

speed range adaptive cruise control)

when:

● The incline uphill or downhill is

greater than 20%.

● The electric parking brake is

applied.

184 Driving and operating

● The vehicle is being held to a stop

by the system for more than

5 minutes.

● The vehicle stops, the driver's

seat belt is unbuckled and the

driver's door is opened.

When adaptive cruise control is

deactivated, the control indicator C

changes from green to white and a

pop-up message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

The stored speed is maintained.

On Midlevel display, the stored speed

is indicated in brackets in the Driver

Information Centre when the system

is deactivated but not switched off.

On Uplevel display, the adaptive

cruise control symbol C changes

from green to white when the system

is deactivated but not switched off.

9Warning

When adaptive cruise control is

deactivated, the driver must take

over full brake and engine control

immediately.

Switching off the system

Press v to switch off adaptive cruise

control. The control indicatorC

extinguishes in the Driver Information

Centre. The stored speed is deleted.

Switching off the ignition also

switches off adaptive cruise control

and deletes the stored speed.

Driver's attention

● Use adaptive cruise control

carefully on bends or mountain

roads, as it can lose the vehicle

ahead and needs time to detect it

again.

● Do not use the system on

slippery roads as it can create

rapid changes in tyre traction

(wheel spinning), so that you

could lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not use adaptive cruise

control during rain, snow or

heavy dirt, as the radar sensor

can be covered by a water film,

dust, ice or snow. This reduces or

suppresses completely the

visibility. In case of sensor

blockage, clean the sensor

cover.

System limits

9Warning

The system's automatic brake

force does not permit hard braking

and the braking level may not be

sufficient to avoid a collision.

● After a sudden lane change, the

system needs a certain time to

detect the next preceding

vehicle. So if a new vehicle is

detected, the system may

accelerate instead of braking.

Driving and operating 185

● Adaptive cruise control does

ignore the oncoming traffic.

● Adaptive cruise control does not

consider pedestrians and

animals for braking and driving

off.

● Adaptive cruise control considers

stopped vehicles only at low

speed.

● Do not use adaptive cruise

control when towing a trailer.

● Do not use adaptive cruise

control on roads with an incline of

more than 10%.

Bends

The adaptive cruise control calculates

a predicted path based on the

centrifugal force. This predicted path

considers the current bend

characteristic, but cannot consider a

future bend change. The system may

lose the current vehicle ahead or

consider a vehicle which is not in the

actual lane. This can happen when

entering or exiting a bend or if the

bend gets stronger or weaker. The

camrea applies a certain correction

based on the detectable lane

markings. The control indicator A will

extinguish, if a vehicle ahead is no

longer detected.

If the centrifugal force is too high in a

bend, the system slows down the

vehicle slightly. This braking level is

not designed to avoid spinning-off the

bend. The driver is responsible for

reducing the selected speed before

entering a bend and in general to

adapt the speed to the road type and

to existing speed limits.

Motorways

On motorways, adapt the set speed

to the situation and the weather.

Always consider that adaptive cruise

control has a limited visibility range, a

limited braking level and a certain

reaction time to verify if a vehicle is on

the driving path or not. Furthermore,

adaptive cruise control was designed

to brake as late as possible to allow

changing the lane before the

automatic braking. Adaptive cruise

control may not be able to brake the

vehicle in time to avoid a collision with

a much slower vehicle or after a lane

change. This is particularly true while

driving fast or if the visibility is

reduced due to weather conditions.

While entering or exiting a motorway,

adaptive cruise control may lose the

vehicle ahead and accelerate up to

the set speed. For this reason,

decrease the set speed before the

exit or before the entry.

186 Driving and operating

Vehicle path changes

If another vehicle enters your driving

path, adaptive cruise control will first

consider the vehicle when it is

completely in your path. Be ready to

take action and depress the brake

pedal, if you need to brake more

quickly.

Hill and trailer considerations

9Warning

Do not use adaptive cruise control

on steep hill roads.

System performance on hills depends

on vehicle speed, vehicle load, traffic

conditions and the road gradient. It

may not detect a vehicle in your path

while driving on hills. Full speed range

adaptive control is deactivated

automatically, as the vehicle is

stopping uphill on an incline greater

than 10%. In this condition, be

prepared to take control of the

vehicle.

Note that applying the brake

deactivates the system.

Radar unit

The radar unit is mounted behind the

radiator grille behind or below the

brand emblem.

Number plate mounting 3 222.

9Warning

The radar unit was aligned

carefully during manufacture.

Therefore, in the event of a front-

end impact, do not use the system.

The front bumper may appear to

be intact, however the sensor

behind can be out of position and

react incorrectly. After an

accident, consult a workshop to

verify and adjust the radar unit

position.

Settings

Settings can be changed in the

vehicle personalisation menu in the

Info Display.

Select the relevant setting in Settings

I Vehicle in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 121.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Driving and operating 187

Fault

If the adaptive cruise control does not

work due to temporary conditions

(e.g. blockage by ice, overheated

brakes or low speed manoeuvres) or

if there is a permanent system error,

then a message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 122.

Forward collision alert

The forward collision alert may help to

avoid or reduce the harm caused by

front-end crashes.

If the vehicle is equipped with

conventional cruise control, the

forward collision alert uses the front

camera in the windscreen to detect a

vehicle directly ahead, in your path.

If the vehicle is equipped with

adaptive cruise control, the forward

collision alert uses the radar sensor to

detect a vehicle directly ahead, in

your path.

Number plate mounting 3 222

A vehicle ahead is indicated by the

control indicator A.

If a vehicle directly ahead is

approached too quickly, a warning

chime and alert in the Driver

Information Centre is provided.

A precondition is that forward collision

alert with front camera system or

radar sensor is not deactivated in the

vehicle personalisation menu 3 124.

Activation

Forward collision alert with front

camera detects vehicles to distances

and operates automatically at all

speeds above walking speed.

Forward collision alert with radar

sensor detects vehicles to distances

and operates automatically at all

speeds above walking speed.

Alerting the driver

The vehicle ahead control indicator

A illuminates green in the instrument

cluster when the system has detected

a vehicle in the driving path.

The control indicator A changes to

yellow when the distance to a

preceding moving vehicle gets too

small or when approaching another

vehicle too rapidly.

Caution

The colour lighting of this control

indicator does not correspond to

local traffic laws on following

distance. The driver bears full

responsibility for maintaining safe

following distance according to

applicable traffic rules, weather

and road conditions etc. at all

times.

188 Driving and operating

When the time to a potential collision

with a vehicle in front gets too small

and a collision is imminent, the

collision alert symbol pops-up in the

Driver Information Centre and the

driver gets notified by a warning

chime sound.

Depress the brake pedal and steer

the vehicle, if it is required by the

situation.

Selecting the alert sensitivity

Press V or E to set the alert

sensitivity to near, medium or far.

The first button press shows the

current setting on the Driver

Information Centre. Additional button

presses will change this setting. The

chosen setting will remain until it is

changed. The alert timing will vary

based on vehicle speed. The faster

the vehicle speed, the farther away

the alert will occur. Consider traffic

and weather conditions when

selecting the alert timing.

Note that the alert timing sensitivity

setting is shared with the following

distance setting of the adaptive cruise

control. So changing the alert timing

sensitivity changes the adaptive

cruise control following distance

setting.

Deactivation

The system can be deactivated by the

personalisation menu 3 124.

If the forward collision alert was

deactivated, alert sensitivity is set to

"medium" when ignition is switched

on next time.

The last selected setting will be stored

when the ignition is switched off.

General information

9Warning

Forward collision alert is just a

warning system and does not

apply the brakes. When

approaching a vehicle ahead too

rapidly, it may not provide you

enough time to avoid a collision.

The driver accepts full

responsibility for the appropriate

following distance based on traffic,

weather and visibility conditions.

Driving and operating 189

The complete attention of the

driver is always required while

driving. The driver must always be

ready to take action and apply the

brakes.

System limitations

Forward collision alert is designed to

warn on vehicles only, but may react

also to other objects.

In the following cases, forward

collision alert may not detect a vehicle

ahead or sensor performance is

limited:

● driving on winding or hilly roads

● during nighttime driving

● weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow

● the sensor in the windscreen is

blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud,

dirt, windscreen damage or

affected by foreign items, e.g.

stickers

Following distance

indication

The following distance indication

displays the distance to a preceding

moving vehicle. The front camera in

the windscreen is used to detect the

distance of a vehicle directly ahead in

the vehicle's path. It is active at

speeds above 40 km/h. Number plate

mounting 3 222

When a preceding vehicle is detected

ahead, the distance is indicated in

seconds, displayed on a page in the

Driver Information Centre.

On Midlevel display, choose Info

Menu ? via MENU on the indicator

lever and turn the adjuster wheel to

choose following distance indication

page 3 115

On Uplevel display, select Info menu

via steering wheel buttons and press

o to select following distance

indication 3 115.

The minimum indicated distance is

0.5 seconds.

If there is no vehicle ahead or the

vehicle ahead is out of range, two

dashes will be displayed: -.- sec.

190 Driving and operating

If Adaptive cruise control is active,

this page shows the alert sensitivity

setting instead of following distance

setting 3 179.

Active emergency braking

Active emergency braking can help to

reduce the damage and injury from

crashes with vehicles and obstacles

directly ahead, when a collision can

no longer be avoided either by

manual braking or by steering. Before

the active emergency braking

applies, the driver is warned by the

forward collision alert 3 187.

The feature uses various inputs (e.g.

camera sensor, radar sensor, brake

pressure, vehicle speed) to calculate

the probability of a frontal collision.

9Warning

This system is not intended to

replace the driver responsibility for

driving the vehicle and looking

ahead. Its function is limited to

supplemental use only to reduce

the vehicle speed before a

collision.

The system may not react for

animals. After a sudden lane

change, the system needs a

certain time to detect the next

preceding vehicle.

The driver shall always be ready to

take action and apply the brakes

and steer to avoid collisions.

Functionality

If equipped only with front camera the

active emergency braking operates in

forward gear above walking speed up

to 80 km/h.

With radar sensor active emergency

braking operates in forward gear

above walking speed at all speeds.

Number plate mounting 3 222.

A precondition is that forward collision

alert is not deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation menu 3 124.

The system includes:

● brake preparation system

● emergency automatic braking

● forward looking brake assist

● intelligent brake assist (only with

radar sensor)

Brake preparation system

When approaching a vehicle ahead

so quickly that a collision is likely, the

brake preparation system slightly

pressurises the brakes. This reduces

the response time, when a manual or

automatic braking is requested.

The brake system is prepared so that

braking can occur more rapidly.

If equipped only with front camera the

system operates up to a speed of

80 km/h.

Driving and operating 191

Emergency automatic braking

After activation of brake preparation

system and just before the imminent

collision, this function automatically

applies limited braking to reduce the

impact speed of the collision or

prohibit a crash. Depending on the

situation, the vehicle may

automatically brake moderately or

hard. This front automatic braking can

only occur if a vehicle ahead is

detected, indicated by the vehicle

ahead indicator A 3 187.

If equipped only with front camera the

system operates up to a speed of

80 km/h.

Below a speed of 40 km/h the system

can apply full braking.

Emergency automatic braking may

slow the vehicle to a complete stop to

try to avoid a potential crash. If this

happens, emergency automatic

braking may engage the electric

parking brake to hold the vehicle at a

stop. To release press the electric

parking brake button or firmly press

the accelerator pedal.

9Warning

Emergency automatic braking is

an emergency crash preparation

feature and is not designed to

avoid crashes. Do not rely on the

system to brake the vehicle.

Emergency automatic braking will

not brake outside of its operating

speed range and only responds to

detected vehicles.

Forward looking brake assist

In addition to the brake preparation

system and emergency automatic

braking, the forward looking brake

assist function makes the brake assist

more sensitive. Therefore, pressing

the brake pedal less strongly results

in immediate hard braking. This

function helps the driver brake

quicker and harder before the

imminent collision.

If equipped only with front camera the

system operates up to a speed of

85 km/h.

9Warning

Active emergency braking is not

designed to apply hard

autonomous braking or to

automatically avoid a collision. It is

designed to reduce the vehicle

speed before a collision. It may not

react for pedestrians or animals.

After a sudden lane change, the

system needs a certain time to

detect the next preceding vehicle.

The complete attention of the

driver is always required while

driving. The driver shall always be

ready to take action and apply the

brakes and steer to avoid

collisions. The system is designed

to work with all occupants wearing

their seat belts.

Intelligent Brake Assist

If the vehicle is equipped with radar

sensor Intelligent brake assist may

activate when the brake pedal is

applied quickly by providing a boost

to braking based on the speed of

approach and distance to a vehicle

ahead.

192 Driving and operating

Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal

movement during this time is normal

and the brake pedal should continue

to be applied as needed. Intelligent

brake assist will automatically

disengage only when the brake pedal

is released.

9Warning

Intelligent brake assist may

increase vehicle braking in

situations when it may not be

necessary. You could block the

flow of traffic. If this occurs, take

your foot off the brake pedal and

then apply the brakes as needed.

Deactivation

On vehicles with front camera active

emergency braking can be

deactivated by repeatedly pressing

the gap switch V to Off setting,

3 187. If deactivated a message is

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

On vehicles with radar sensor the

system can be disabled in the

personalisation menu in the Info

Display 3 124.

We recommend to deactivate the

system or set it to alert only in the

following cases:

● when the vehicle is being towed

● if a trailer is attached to the

vehicle

● before using an automatic car

wash with ignition switched on

● if the windscreen has been

damaged close to the camera

● if the front bumper has been

damaged

System limitations

In some cases, the active emergency

braking system may provide an

automatic braking in situations that

seem to be unnecessary, for instance

in parking garages, due to traffic signs

in a curve or due to vehicles in

another lane. This is normal

operation, the vehicle does not need

service. Firmly apply the accelerator

pedal to override the automatic

braking if the situation and the

surroundings permit.

Driving and operating 193

In the following cases, Active

emergency braking performance is

limited:

● Driving on winding or hilly roads.

● Detecting all vehicles, especially

vehicles with a trailer, tractors,

muddy vehicles, etc.

● Detecting a vehicle when

weather limits visibility, such as in

fog, rain, or snow.

● During nighttime driving.

● Weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow.

● The sensor in the windscreen is

blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud,

dirt, windscreen damage or

stickered.

To avoid malfunction keep the areas

of the camera sensor in the

windscreen and the radar sensor in

the radiator grille always clean from

dirt, dust, ice and snow.

Complete attention is always required

while driving, and you should be

ready to take action and apply the

brakes and / or steer the vehicle to

avoid crashes.

Fault

In case the system requires a service,

a message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre.

If the system does not work as it

should do, vehicle messages are

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 122.

Front pedestrian protection

Front pedestrian protection may help

to avoid or reduce the harm caused

by front-end crashes with nearby

pedestrians when driving in a forward

gear.

The system uses the front camera in

the windscreen to detect a pedestrian

directly ahead, in your path.

Front pedestrian protection can

detect and alert to pedestrians in a

forward gear at speeds between

8 km/h and 80 km/h. Additionally

Front pedestrian protection can

provide a boost to braking or

automatically brake the vehicle.

During daytime driving, the system

detects pedestrians up to a distance

of approx. 40 m. During nighttime

driving, system performance is

limited.

Front pedestrian protection can be

set to Off, Alert, or Alert & Brake in

vehicle personalisation 3 124.

9Danger

Front pedestrian braking does not

provide an alert or automatically

brake the vehicle, unless it detects

a pedestrian.

The system may not detect

pedestrians, including children,

when the pedestrian is not directly

ahead, not fully visible, not

standing upright, or when part of a

group.

Front pedestrian protection includes:

● detecting front pedestrian ahead

● front pedestrian alert

● automatic braking

194 Driving and operating

Detecting front pedestrian ahead

A pedestrian ahead up to a distance

of approx. 40 m is indicated by the

control indicator 7 in the instrument

cluster.

Front pedestrian alert

When approaching a detected

pedestrian too quickly, the collision

alert symbol pops up in the Driver

Information Centre. A warning chime

is provided. The brake system may

prepare for driver braking to occur

more rapidly which can cause a brief,

mild deceleration. Continue to apply

the brake pedal as required.

Cruise control or Adaptive cruise

control may be disengaged when the

Front pedestrian alert occurs.

Automatic braking

If a crash into a pedestrian directly

ahead is imminent, and the brakes

have not been applied, Automatic

braking may automatically brake

moderately or brake hard. This can

help to avoid some very low speed

pedestrian crashes or reduce

pedestrian injury.

Automatic braking levels may be

reduced under certain conditions,

such as higher speeds.

If this happens, automatic braking

may engage the Electric parking

brake to hold the vehicle at a stop.

Release the parking brake. Pressing

the accelerator pedal will also release

Automatic braking and Electric

parking brake 3 171.

This system includes Intelligent brake

assist, and the Emergency automatic

braking system may also respond to

pedestrians.

Active emergency braking 3 190.

Automatic braking can be disabled in

the vehicle personalisation menu

3 124.

General information

9Warning

The driver must always be ready

to take action and apply the brakes

and steer to avoid collisions.

9Warning

Front pedestrian braking may alert

or automatically brake the vehicle

suddenly in situations where it is

unexpected and undesired. It

could falsely alert or brake for

objects similar in shape or size to

pedestrians, including shadows.

This is normal operation and the

vehicle does not need a service.

To override Automatic braking,

firmly depress the accelerator

pedal, if it is safe to do so.

Driving and operating 195

9Warning

Using the Front pedestrian braking

system while towing a trailer could

cause loss of vehicle control and

crash. Turn the system to Alert or

Off in the vehicle personalisation

when towing a trailer.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

System limitations

In the following cases, front

pedestrian protection may not detect

a pedestrian ahead or sensor

performance is limited:

● Vehicle speed is out of range

from 8 km/h to 80 km/h in forward

gear.

● The distance to an pedestrian

ahead is more than 40 m.

● Driving on winding or hilly roads.

● During nighttime driving.

● Weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow.

● The sensor in the windscreen is

blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud,

dirt, windscreen damage or

affected by foreign items, e.g.

stickers.

Parking assist

General information

When the trailer hitch is attached,

change the configuration settings in

the vehicle personalisation menu in

the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

When attaching a trailer or bike

carrier to the trailer hitch, the parking

assist is deactivated.

Rear parking assist

9Warning

It is the driver who bears full

responsibility for the parking

manoeuvre.

Always check the surrounding

area while reversing and using the

rear parking assist system.

The rear parking assist makes

parking easier by measuring the

distance between the vehicle and

rear obstacles. It informs and warns

the driver by giving acoustic signals

and display indication.

The system has four ultrasonic

parking sensors in the rear bumper.

Activation

After ignition is switched on, the rear

parking assist is activated.

196 Driving and operating

An illuminated LED in the parking

assist button r indicates that the

system is ready to operate.

Indication

The system warns the driver with

acoustic signals against potentially

hazardous obstacles behind the

vehicle in a distance range up to

50 cm while a forward gear is

engaged, or up to 1.5 m while reverse

gear is engaged.

Depending on which side of the

vehicle is closer to an obstacle, you

will hear acoustic warning signals in

the vehicle on the respective side.

The interval between the signals

becomes shorter as the vehicle gets

closer to that obstacle. When the

distance is less than approx. 40 cm,

the signal is continuous.

Additionally, the distance to rear

obstacles is displayed by changing

distance lines in the Driver

Information Centre 3 115.

The distance indication can be

inhibited by vehicle messages with a

higher priority. After dismissing the

message distance indication appears

again.

Deactivation

Press parking assist button r to

deactivate, the LED in the button

extinguishes.

Fault

In the event of a fault or if the system

does not work temporarily, e.g.

because of high external noise level

or other interference factors, the LED

in the button flashes for

three seconds and then extinguishes.

A message is indicated in the Driver

Information Centre.

Front-rear parking assist

9Warning

The driver bears full responsibility

for the parking manoeuvre.

Always check the surrounding

area when driving backwards or

forwards while using parking

assist system.

The front-rear parking assist

measures the distance between the

vehicle and obstacles in front and

behind the vehicle. It informs and

warns the driver by giving acoustic

signals and display indication.

It uses two different acoustic warning

signals for the front and rear

monitoring areas, each with a

different tone frequency.

Driving and operating 197

The system has four ultrasonic

parking sensors each in the rear and

front bumper.

Activation

The system is activated automatically

at a speed up to 11 km/h.

An illuminated LED in the parking

assist button r indicates that the

system is ready to operate.

If r is switched off within an ignition

cycle, the parking assist is

deactivated. If vehicle speed has

exceeded 25 km/h beforehand,

parking assist will be reactivated

when speed drops below 11 km/h.

When the system is deactivated, the

LED in the button extinguishes and a

message pops up in the Driver

Information Centre.

Indication

The system warns the driver with

acoustic and visuel signals against

potentially hazardous obstacles in

front of the vehicle in a distance range

up to 120 cm and against potentially

hazardous obstacles behind the

vehicle in a distance range up to

50 cm while a forward gear is

engaged, or up to 150 cm while

reverse gear is engaged.

Depending on which side of the

vehicle is closer to an obstacle, you

will hear acoustic warning signals in

the vehicle on the respective side.

The interval between the signals

becomes shorter as the vehicle gets

closer to that obstacle. When the

distance is less than approx. 40 cm,

the signal is continuous.

Additionally, the distance to rear and

front obstacles is displayed by

changing distance lines in the Driver

Information Centre 3 115 or,

depending on the version, on the Info

Display 3 121.

198 Driving and operating

The distance indication can be

inhibited by vehicle messages with a

higher priority. After dismissing the

message distance indication appears

again.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated

automatically when vehicle speed

exceeds 11 km/h.

Manual deactivation is also possible

by pressing the parking assist button

When the system is deactivated

manually, the LED in the button

extinguishes and a message pops up

in the Driver Information Centre.

After a manual deactivation, the front-

rear parking assist is activated again

if r is pressed or if reverse gear is

engaged.

The complete system can be

manually deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation menu in the

Info Display. It remains deactivated

during the ignition cycle or until

activation in personalisation menu

again.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Fault

In the event of a fault or if the system

does not work temporarily, e.g.

because of high external noise level

or other interference factors, a

message pops-up in the Driver

Information Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 122.

Advanced parking assist

9Warning

The driver bears full responsibility

for accepting the parking slot

suggested by the system and the

parking manoeuvre.

Always check the surrounding

area in all directions when using

the advanced parking assist.

The advanced parking assist

measures a suitable parking slot

while passing, calculates the

trajectory and automatically steers

the vehicle into a parallel or

perpendicular parking slot.

Instructions are given in the Driver

Information Centre 3 115 or,

depending on the version, on the Info

Display 3 121, supported by acoustic

signals.

The driver must control acceleration,

braking and gear shifting, while

steering is done automatically.

Driving and operating 199

Advanced parking assist is always

combined with front-rear parking

assist. Both systems use the same

sensors in the front and rear bumper.

The system has six ultrasonic parking

sensors each in both the rear and

front bumper.

Activation of advanced parking assist

Advanced parking assist can only be

activated when driving forwards.

When searching for a parking slot, the

system is ready to operate with a

short press of (.

The system recognises and

memorises 10 m for parallel parking

slots or 6 m for perpendicular parking

slots in the parking assist mode.

The system can only be activated and

searches for a parking slot at a speed

up to 30 km/h.

The maximum allowed parallel

distance between the vehicle and a

row of parked cars is 150 cm.

Functionality

Parking slot searching mode,

indication in the Driver Information

Centre

Select parallel or perpendicular

parking slot in Driver Information

Centre by long press on (.

The system is configured to detect

parking slots by default on the

passenger side. To detect parking

slots on the driver side, switch on the

turn lights on the driver side.

200 Driving and operating

When a slot is detected, a visual

feedback in the Driver Information

Centre and an acoustic signal is

given.

Indication in the Info Display

Select parallel or perpendicular

parking slot by tapping the respective

icon on the display.

Select parking side by tapping the

respective icon on the display.

When a slot is detected, a visual

feedback on the Info Display and an

acoustic signal is given.

If the driver does not stop the vehicle

after a parking slot is proposed, the

system starts to search for another

suitable parking slot.

Park guiding mode

The parking slot suggestion of the

system is accepted when the vehicle

is stopped by the driver within ten

metres for parallel parking slots or

six metres for perpendicular parking

slots after the message to stop the car

is indicated. The system calculates

the optimal path into the parking slot.

Driving and operating 201

A brief vibration in the steering wheel

after engaging reverse gear indicates

that the steering is controlled by the

system. Then the vehicle is steered

into the slot automatically by giving

the driver detailed instructions for

braking, accelerating and gear

shifting. The driver must keep hands

away from the steering wheel.

Always pay attention to the signals of

the front-rear parking assist.

Continuous signal indicates that the

distance to an obstacle is less than

approx. 40 cm.

If, for any reason, the driver must take

over control of the steering, hold the

steering wheel only at the outer edge.

Automatic steering is cancelled in this

event.

Display indication

The instructions on the display show:

● General hints and warning

messages.

● A hint when driving faster than

30 km/h during parking slot

searching mode.

● The demand to stop the vehicle,

when a parking slot is detected.

● The direction of driving during the

parking manoeuvre.

● The demand to shift into reverse

or first gear.

● The demand to stop or to drive

slowly.

● For some of the instructions a

progress bar is shown in the

Driver Information Centre.

● The successful completion of the

parking manoeuvre indicated by

a message in the Driver

Information Centre and a chime.

● The cancelling of a parking

manoeuvre.

Display priorities

Advanced parking assist indication in

the Driver Information Centre can be

inhibited by vehicle messages with a

higher priority. After approving the

message by pressing SET/CLR on

the indicator lever or 9 on the

steering wheel, advanced parking

assist instructions appear again and

the parking manoeuvre can be

continued.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated by:

● a short press of (

● parking manoeuvre successfully

ended

● driving faster than 30 km/h during

parking slot search

● driving faster than 8 km/h during

parking guidance

● driver interference on steering

wheel detected

● exceeding the maximum

permissible gear changes of

eleven

● switching off the ignition

Deactivation by the driver or by the

system during manoeuvring will be

indicated by a message on the

display. Additionally, an acoustic

signal sounds.

Fault

A message appears when:

● There is a fault in the system.

● The system is not operational.

● Any of the deactivation reasons

described above apply.

202 Driving and operating

If an object is detected during parking

instructions, a message to stop the

vehicle is indicated. Removing the

object will resume the parking

manoeuvre. If the object is not

removed, the system will be

deactivated. A long press of ( will

activate the system and search for a

new parking slot.

Basic notes on parking assist

systems

9Warning

Under certain circumstances,

various reflective surfaces on

objects or clothing as well as

external noise sources may cause

the system to fail to detect

obstacles.

Special attention must be paid to

low obstacles which can damage

the lower part of the bumper.

Caution

Performance of the system can be

reduced when sensors are

covered, e.g. by ice or snow.

Performance of the parking assist

system can be reduced due to

heavy loading.

Special conditions apply if there

are taller vehicles in the vicinity

(e.g. off-road vehicles, mini vans,

vans). Object identification and

correct distance indication in the

upper part of these vehicles

cannot be guaranteed.

Objects with a very small reflection

cross-section, e.g. objects of

narrow size or soft materials, may

not be detected by the system.

Parking assist systems do not

detect objects outside the

detection range.

Note

It is possible that the sensor detects

a non-existing object caused by

echo disturbance from external

acoustic noise or mechanical

misalignments (sporadic false

warnings may occur).

Make sure that the front number

plate is properly mounted (not bent

and no gaps to the bumper on the left

or right side) and the sensors are

firmly in place. The performance of

the parking assist could be reduced

if a number plate holder is used.

Advanced parking assist system

may not respond to changes in the

available parking space after

initiating a parking manoeuvre. The

system may recognize an entry, a

gateway, a courtyard or even a

crossing as a parking slot. After

selecting reverse gear the system

will start a parking manoeuvre.

Low curbs and surface irregularities,

e.g. on construction zones, are not

detected by the system. The driver

accepts responsibility.

Note

After production, the system

requires a calibration. For optimal

parking guidance, a driving distance

of at least 10 km, including a number

of bends, is required.

Driving and operating 203

Side blind spot alert

The Side blind spot alert system

detects and reports objects on either

side of the vehicle, within a specified

"blind spot" zone. The system

displays a visual alert in each exterior

mirror, when detecting objects that

may not be visible in the interior and

exterior mirrors.

Side blind spot alert uses some of the

advanced parking assist sensors

which are located in the front and rear

bumper on both sides of the vehicle.

9Warning

Side blind spot alert does not

replace driver vision.

The system does not detect:

● vehicles outside the side blind

zones which may be rapidly

approaching

● pedestrians, cyclists or animals

Before changing a lane, always

check all mirrors, look over the

shoulder and use the turn lights.

When the system detects a vehicle in

the side blind zone while driving

forwards, either while passing a

vehicle or being passed, a yellow

warning symbol B will illuminate in

the relevant exterior mirror. If the

driver then activates the turn lights,

the warning symbol B starts flashing

yellow as a warning not to change

lanes.

Note

If the overtaking vehicle is at least

10 km/h faster than the vehicle being

overtaken, the warning symbol B in

the relevant exterior mirror may not

illuminate.

Side blind spot alert is active from

speeds of 10 km/h up to 140 km/h.

Driving faster than 140 km/h

deactivates the system, indicated by

low lighting warning symbols B in

both exterior mirrors. Reducing the

speed again will extinguish the

warning symbols. If a vehicle is then

detected in the blind zone, the

warning symbols B will illuminate as

normal on the relevant side.

When the vehicle is started, both

exterior mirror displays will briefly

illuminate to indicate that the system

is operating.

The system can be activated or

deactivated in the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Deactivation is indicated by a

message in the Driver Information

Centre.

Detection zones

The detection zones start at the rear

bumper and extend approx. 3 m

rearwards and to the sides. The

height of the zone is approx. between

0.5 m and 2 m off the ground.

204 Driving and operating

The system is deactivated if the

vehicle is towing a trailer or if a bike

carrier is attached.

Side blind spot alert is designed to

ignore stationary objects, e.g.

guardrails, posts, curbs, walls and

beams. Parked vehicles or oncoming

vehicles are not detected.

Fault

Occasional missed alerts can occur

under normal circumstances and will

increase in wet conditions.

Side blind spot alert does not operate

when the left or right corners of the

rear bumper are covered with mud,

dirt, snow, ice, slush, or in heavy

rainstorms.

Cleaning instructions 3 267.

In the event of a fault in the system or

if the system does not work due to

temporary conditions, the symbols in

the mirrors will be permanently

illuminated and a message is

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre. Seek the assistance of a

workshop.

Rear view camera

The rear view camera assists the

driver when reversing by displaying a

view of the area behind the vehicle.

The view of the camera is displayed

in the Info Display.

9Warning

The rear view camera does not

replace driver vision. Note that

objects that are outside the

camera's field of view and the

parking assist sensors, e.g. below

the bumper or underneath the

vehicle, are not displayed.

Do not reverse or park the vehicle

using only the rear view camera.

Always check the surrounding of

the vehicle before driving.

Activation

Rear view camera is automatically

activated when reverse gear is

engaged.

Functionality

On 5-door hatchback the camera is

mounted between the number plate

lights.

On Sports Tourer the camera is

mounted under the tailgate moulding.

Driving and operating 205

The area displayed by the camera is

limited. The distance of the image that

appears on the display differs from

the actual distance.

Guiding lines

Dynamic guiding lines are horizontal

lines at one metre intervals projected

onto the picture to define the distance

to displayed objects.

Trajectory lane of the vehicle is

shown in accordance with the

steering angle.

Warning symbols

Warning symbols are indicated as

triangles 9 on the picture, which show

obstacles detected by the rear

sensors of the advanced parking

assist.

Additionally, 9 appears on the top

line of the Info Display with the

warning to check the vehicle

surrounding.

Deactivation

The camera is switched off when a

certain forward speed is exceeded or

if reverse gear is not engaged for

approx. 15 seconds.

Deactivation of guiding lines and

warning symbols

7'' Colour Info Display: Activation or

deactivation of the visual guiding lines

and the warning symbols can be

changed via touch buttons in the

lower zone of the display.

8'' Colour Info Display: Activation or

deactivation of the visual guiding lines

and the warning symbols can be

206 Driving and operating

changed in the Settings menu in the

Info Display. Select the relevant

setting in Settings I Rear Camera.

Info Display 3 121.

Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

System limitations

The rear view camera may not

operate properly when:

● The surrounding is dark.

● The sun or the beam of

headlights is shining directly into

the camera lenses.

● During nighttime driving.

● Weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow.

● The camera lenses are blocked

by snow, ice, slush, mud, dirt.

Clean the lense, rinse with water,

and wipe with a soft cloth.

● The vehicle is towing a trailer.

● The vehicle had a rear end

accident.

● There are extreme temperature

changes.

Fault messages are displayed with a

9 on the top line of the Info Display.

Traffic sign assistant

Functionality

Traffic sign assistant detects

designated traffic signs via a front

camera and displays them in the

Driver Information Centre.

If the vehicle is equipped with an

embedded navigation system, traffic

signs from data maps may be

included additionally.

Traffic signs, which will be detected,

are:

Limit and no passing signs

● speed limit

● no passing

● end of speed limit

● end of no passing

Road signs

Beginning and end of:

● city regions (country-specific)

● motorways

● A-roads

● play streets

Add on signs

● additional hints to traffic signs

● restriction of trailer towing

● tractor constraints

● wet warning

● ice warning

● time constraints

● distance constraints

● direction arrows

Speed limit signs and no passing

signs are displayed in the Driver

Information Centre until the next

Driving and operating 207

speed limit sign or end of speed limit

is detected or up to a defined sign

timeout.

Indication of multiple signs on the

display is possible.

An exclamation mark in a frame

indicates that there is an additional

sign detected which cannot be clearly

identified by the system.

The system operates without loss of

performance up to a speed of

200 km/h depending on the lighting

conditions. At night the system is

active up to a speed of 160 km/h.

Display indication

Information about the currently valid

traffic signs is available on the

designated traffic sign assistant page

in the Driver Information Centre.

Additionally, the currently valid speed

limit is displayed permanently in the

lower line of the Driver Information

Centre. In case a speed limit with add

on sign is available, a + symbol is

displayed in this area.

On Midlevel display, choose Info

Menu ? via MENU and select

traffic sign assistant page with the

adjuster wheel on the indicator lever

3 115.

208 Driving and operating

On Uplevel display, choose Info

Menu via right steering wheel buttons

and press P or Q to select traffic

sign assistant page 3 115.

When another page on the Driver

Information Centre menu was

selected and then traffic sign

assistant page is chosen again, the

last recognised traffic sign will be

displayed.

Alert function

The alert function can be activated or

deactivated in the setting menu of the

traffic sign assistant page.

Once activated and when the traffic

sign detection page is currently not

displayed, newly detected speed limit

and no passing signs are displayed

as pop-up alerts in the Driver

Information Centre.

On Midlevel Display, when traffic sign

assistant page is displayed, press

SET/CLR on the indicator lever.

Select Alerts ON or Alerts OFF by

turning the adjuster wheel and press

SET/CLR.

On Uplevel Display, when traffic sign

assistant page is displayed, press q

on the steering wheel controls.

Driving and operating 209

Activate alerts by setting J,

deactivate alerts by setting I via

button 9.

Pop-up alert is displayed for approx.

8 seconds in the Driver Information

Centre.

System reset

The content of the traffic sign display

can be cleared in the setting menu of

the traffic sign assistant page by

selecting Reset and confirm by

pressing SET/CLR on the indicator

lever or 9 on the steering wheel

controls.

Alternatively, SET/CLR or 9 can be

pressed for 3 seconds to clear the

content of the page.

Upon successful reset, a chime will

sound and the following “Default

Sign” is indicated until the next traffic

sign is detected or provided by map

data of the navigation system.

In some cases, traffic sign assistant is

cleared up automatically by the

system.

Clearing of traffic signs

There are different scenarios that

lead to clearing the currently

displayed traffic signs. After clearing,

the “Default Sign” or a sign from

navigation map data is displayed in

the Driver Information Centre.

Reasons for signs being cleared:

● A predefined distance was driven

or time has elapsed (differs for

each sign type)

● Vehicle drives through a turn

● If no navigation map data is

available and speed drops below

52 km/h (city entry detection)

● If navigation map data is

available and a city entry / exit

was detected due to map data

change

Traffic sign detection in

conjunction with navigation

system

If the vehicle is equipped with a

navigation system, the currently

displayed sign can either originate

from optical sign detection or from the

map data.

If the currently displayed sign

originates from map data and the map

information changes, a new sign will

be displayed. This may lead to

detection of a new sign although no

sign on the road may have been

passed.

210 Driving and operating

System limitations

Traffic sign assistant may not operate

properly when:

● Vehicle speed is faster than

200 km/h.

● Driving on winding or hilly roads.

● During nighttime driving.

● The area of the windscreen,

where the front camera is

located, is not clean or affected

by foreign items, e.g. stickers.

● Weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow.

● The sun is shining directly into

the camera lens.

● Traffic signs are completely or

partially covered or difficult to

discern.

● Traffic signs are incorrectly

mounted or damaged.

● Traffic signs do not comply with

the Vienna Convention on traffic

signs.

● The navigation map data is

outdated.

Caution

The system is intended to help the

driver within a defined speed

range to discern certain traffic

signs. Do not ignore traffic signs

which are not displayed by the

system.

The system does not discern any

other than the conventional traffic

signs that might give or end a

speed limit.

Do not let this special feature

tempt you into taking risks when

driving.

Always adapt speed to the road

conditions.

The driver assistance systems do

not relieve the driver from full

responsibility for vehicle

operation.

Lane keep assist

Lane keep assist supports the driver

to avoid unintentional crossing of lane

markings. The front camera observes

the lane markings between which the

vehicle is driving. If the vehicle

approaches a lane marking without

activated turn signal, the steering

wheel is gently turned to position the

vehicle back into the lane. Turn

steering wheel in same direction, if

system steers not sufficient. Turn

steering wheel gently into opposite

direction, if lane change is intended.

The Lane Keep Assist informs the

driver with an optical warning during

the trajectory correction. If the system

is not able to avoid the lane crossing

an additional acoustic warning is

issued.

Unintended lane departure is

assumed:

● without using the turn lights

● using the turn lights in the

opposite direction of the lane

departure

● without braking

● without acceleration

● without active steering

Note

The system might be inactive when

the detected lane markings are

ambiguous or insufficient, e.g. in

construction areas.

Driving and operating 211

Note

The system may be switched off if it

detects lanes which are too narrow,

too wide or too curved.

Activation

The lane keep assist is activated by

pressing a. The LED in the button

illuminates to indicate that the system

is switched on.

When the control indicator a in the

instrument cluster illuminates green,

the system is ready to assist.

The system is operational at vehicle

speeds between 60 km/h and

180 km/h and if lane markings are

available.

The system gently turns the steering

wheel and the control indicator a

changes to yellow, if the vehicle

approaches a detected lane marking

without using the turn lights in that

direction.

The system alerts by flashing a

together with three chimes, from the

respective direction, if the lane is

departed significantly.

The system is only operable when a

lane marking is detected.

If the system only detects lane

markings on one side of the road, it

will only assist for this side.

Lane keep assist detects hands-free

driving. In this case a message in the

Driver Information Centre pops-up

and a chime sounds as long as lane

keep assist detects hands-free

driving.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated by

pressing a; the LED in the button

extinguishes.

The system is deactivated

automatically when a trailer is

detected.

Fault

The system performance may be

affected by:

● Windscreen not clean or affected

by foreign items, e.g. stickers

● Close vehicles ahead

● Banked roads

● Winding or hilly roads

● Road edges

● Roads with poor lane markings

● Sudden lighting changes

● Adverse environmental

conditions e.g. heavy rain or

snow

● Vehicle modifications, e.g. tyres

● Fogged windscreen

212 Driving and operating

Manual switch off the lane keep assist

if the system is disturbed by tar

marks, shadows, road cracks,

temporary or construction lane

markings, or other road

imperfections.

9Warning

Always keep your attention on the

road and maintain proper vehicle

position within the lane, otherwise

vehicle damage, injury or death

could occur.

Lane keep assist does not

continuously steer the vehicle.

The system may not keep the

vehicle in the lane or give an alert,

even if a lane marking is detected.

The steering of the lane keep

assist may not be sufficient to

avoid a lane departure.

The system may not detect hands-

off driving due to external

influences like road condition and

surface and weather. The driver

has full responsibility to control the

vehicle and is always required to

keep the hands on the steering

wheel while driving.

Using the system while towing a

trailer or on slippery roads could

cause loss of control of the vehicle

and a crash. Switch the system off.

Fuel

Fuel for petrol engines

Only use unleaded fuel that complies

with European standard EN 228 or

equivalent.

The engine is capable of running with

fuel that contains up to 10% ethanol

(e.g. named E10).

Use fuel with the recommended

octane rating. A lower octane rating

can reduce engine power and torque

and slightly increases fuel

consumption.

Driving and operating 213

Caution

Do not use fuel or fuel additives

that contain metallic compounds

such as manganese-based

additives. This may cause engine

damage.

Caution

Use of fuel that does not comply to

EN 228 or equivalent can lead to

deposits or engine damage.

Caution

Use of fuel with a lower octane

rating than the lowest possible

rating could lead to uncontrolled

combustion and engine damage.

The engine-specific requirements

regarding octane rating are given in

the engine data overview 3 280. A

country-specific label at the fuel filler

flap can supersede the requirement.

Fuel additive

Fuel should contain detergent

additives that help prevent engine

and fuel system deposits from

forming. Clean fuel injectors and

intake valves will allow the emission

control system to work properly. In

certain countries fuel does not

contain sufficient quantities of

additive to keep fuel injectors and

intake valves clean. In these

countries a fuel additive is required for

some engines to make up for this lack

of detergency. Only use fuel additive

approved for the vehicle.

Adding fuel additive to the filled fuel

tank is required at least every

15,000 km or after one year,

whichever occurs first. For further

information, contact your workshop.

Prohibited fuels

Fuels containing oxygenates such as

ethers and ethanol, as well as

reformulated fuel, are available in

some cities. If these fuels comply with

the previously described

specification, then they are

acceptable to use. However, E85

(85% ethanol) and other fuels

containing more than 15% ethanol

must be used only in FlexFuel

vehicles.

Caution

Do not use fuel containing

methanol. It can corrode metal

parts in the fuel system and also

damage plastic and rubber parts.

This damage would not be

covered by the vehicle warranty.

Some fuels, mainly high octane

racing fuels, can contain an octane

enhancing additive called

methylcyclopentadienyl manganese

tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use fuels or

fuel additives with MMT as they can

reduce spark plug life and affect

emission control system

performance. The malfunction

indicator light Z may illuminate

3 110. If this occurs, seek the

assistance of a workshop.

214 Driving and operating

Fuel for diesel engines

Only use diesel fuel that complies

with EN 590 and which has a sulphur

concentration of max. 10 ppm.

Fuels with a biodiesel (compliant with

EN 14214) content of max. 7% by

volume may be used (e.g. named

B7).

If travelling in countries outside the

European Union occasional use of

Euro-Diesel fuel with a sulphur

concentration below 50 ppm is

possible.

Caution

Frequent usage of diesel fuel

containing more than 15 ppm

sulphur will cause severe engine

damage.

Caution

Use of fuel that does not comply to

EN 590 or similar can lead to

engine powerloss, increased wear

or engine damage and may affect

your warranty.

Do not use marine diesel oils, heating

oils, Aquazole and similar diesel-

water emulsions. Diesel fuels must

not be diluted with fuels for petrol

engines.

Low temperature operation

At temperatures below 0° C, some

diesel products with biodiesel blends

may clog, freeze or gel, which may

affect the fuel supply system. Starting

and engine operation may not work

properly. Make sure to fill winter

grade diesel fuel at ambient

temperatures below 0°C.

Arctic grade diesel fuel can be used

in extreme cold temperatures below

-20° C. Using this fuel grade in warm

or hot climates is not recommended

and may cause engine stalling, poor

starting or damage on the fuel

injection system.

Refuelling

9Danger

Before refuelling, switch off

ignition and any external heaters

with combustion chambers.

Follow the operating and safety

instructions of the filling station

when refuelling.

Driving and operating 215

9Danger

Fuel is flammable and explosive.

No smoking. No naked flames or

sparks.

If you can smell fuel in your

vehicle, have the cause of this

remedied immediately by a

workshop.

A label with symbols at the fuel filler

flap is indicating the allowed fuel

types. In Europe the pump nozzles of

the filling stations are marked with

these symbols. Refuel only the

allowed fuel type.

Caution

In case of misfuelling, do not

switch on ignition.

Fuel filler flap is located at right rear

side of the vehicle.

The fuel filler flap can only be opened

if the vehicle is unlocked. Release the

fuel filler flap by pushing the flap.

Petrol and Diesel refuelling

To open, turn the cap slowly

anticlockwise.

The fuel filler cap can be retained in

the bracket on the fuel filler flap.

Place the nozzle in straight position to

the filler neck and press with slight

force to insert.

To refuel, switch on pump nozzle.

After the automatic cut-off, the tank

can be topped up by operating the

pump nozzle a maximum of two more

times.

Caution

Wipe off any overflowing fuel

immediately.

216 Driving and operating

To close, turn the fuel filler cap

clockwise until it clicks.

Close the flap and engage.

Misfuel inhibitor

9Warning

Do not try to open the flap of the

fuel filler neck manually on

vehicles with misfuel inhibitor.

Disregarding this could lead to

trapping of the fingers.

The misfuel inhibitor ensures that the

flap of the fuel filler neck can only be

opened by using the suitable fuel

nozzle or a funnel for emergency

refilling.

In case of an emergency, refill with a

canister. A funnel must be used to

open the cap of the filler neck.

The funnel may be stowed in the load

compartment or the glovebox.

Place the funnel in straight position to

the filler neck and press with slight

force to insert.

After topping-up, clean funnel from

fuel remains and stow it away.

Fuel filler cap

Only use genuine fuel filler caps.

Diesel-engined vehicles have special

fuel filler caps.

Trailer hitch

General information

Only use towing equipment that has

been approved for your vehicle.

Entrust retrofitting of towing

equipment to a workshop. It may be

necessary to make changes that

affect the cooling system, heat

shields or other equipment.

The bulb outage detection function for

trailer brake light cannot detect a

partial bulb outage. E.g. in case of

four bulbs with a power of 5 W each,

the function only detects light outage

when only a single 5 W bulb remains

or none remain.

Fitting of towing equipment could

cover the opening of the towing eye.

If this is the case use the coupling ball

bar for towing. Always keep the

coupling ball bar in the vehicle when

not in use.

Driving and operating 217

Driving characteristics and

towing tips

Before attaching a trailer, lubricate

the coupling ball. However, do not do

so if a stabiliser, which acts on the

coupling ball, is being used to reduce

snaking movements.

During trailer towing do not exceed a

speed of 80 km/h. A maximum speed

of 100 km/h is only appropriate if an

oscillation damper is used and the

permissible gross trailer weight does

not exceed the vehicle’s curb weight.

For trailers with low driving stability

and caravan trailers, the use of an

oscillation damper is strongly

recommended.

If the trailer starts snaking, drive more

slowly, do not attempt to correct the

steering and brake sharply if

necessary.

When driving downhill, drive in the

same gear as if driving uphill and

drive at a similar speed.

Adjust tyre pressure to the value

specified for full load 3 285.

Trailer towing

Trailer loads

The permissible trailer loads are

vehicle and engine-dependent

maximum values which must not be

exceeded. The actual trailer load is

the difference between the actual

gross weight of the trailer and the

actual coupling socket load with the

trailer coupled.

The permissible trailer loads are

specified in the vehicle documents. In

general, they are valid for gradients

up to 12%.

The permissible trailer load applies

up to the specified incline and at sea

level. Since engine power decreases

as altitude increases due to the air

becoming thinner, therefore reducing

climbing ability, the permissible gross

train weight also decreases by 10%

for every 1000 m of altitude. The

gross train weight does not have to be

reduced when driving on roads with

slight inclines (less than 8%, e.g.

motorways).

The permissible gross train weight

must not be exceeded. This weight is

specified on the identification plate

3 276.

Vertical coupling load

The vertical coupling load is the load

exerted by the trailer on the coupling

ball. It can be varied by changing the

weight distribution when loading the

trailer.

The maximum permissible vertical

coupling load is specified on the

towing equipment identification plate

and in the vehicle documents. Always

aim for the maximum load, especially

in the case of heavy trailers. The

vertical coupling load should never

fall below 25 kg.

Rear axle load

When the trailer is coupled and the

towing vehicle fully loaded, the

permissible rear axle load (see

identification plate or vehicle

documents) may be exceeded by

40 kg. If the permissible rear axle load

is exceeded, a maximum speed of

100 km/h applies.

218 Driving and operating

Towing equipment

Caution

When operating without a trailer,

remove the coupling ball bar.

Stowage of coupling ball bar

The bag with the coupling ball bar is

stowed on the rear floor cover in the

load compartment.

Place the strap through the rear right

lashing eye, wrap around twice and

tighten the strap to secure the bag.

Illustration shows 5-door hatchback.

Illustration shows Sports Tourer.

Fitting the coupling ball bar

On Sports Tourer remove cover from

rear bumper by pushing.

Disengage and fold down the

connecting socket. Remove the

sealing plug from the opening for the

coupling ball bar and stow it.

Driving and operating 219

Checking the tensioning of the

coupling ball bar

● Red marking on rotary knob must

point towards green marking on

coupling ball bar.

● The gap between the rotary knob

and the coupling ball bar must be

approx. 6 mm.

●The key must be in position c.

Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must

be tensioned before being inserted:

● Unlock coupling ball bar by

turning key to position c.

● Pull out rotary knob and turn

clockwise as far as it will go.

Inserting the coupling ball bar

Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar

in the opening and push firmly

upwards until it audibly engages.

The rotary handle snaps back into its

original position resting against the

coupling ball bar without a gap.

9Warning

Do not touch rotary handle during

insertion.

Lock the coupling ball bar by turning

the key to position e. Remove the key

and close the protective flap.

Eye for break-away stopping cable

220 Driving and operating

Illustration shows 5-door hatchback.

Illustration shows Sports Tourer.

Attach breakaway stopping cable to

eye.

Check that the coupling ball bar is

correctly installed

● Green marking on rotary knob

must point towards green

marking on coupling ball bar.

● There must be no gap between

the rotary handle and the

coupling ball bar.

● The coupling ball bar must be

firmly engaged in the opening.

● The coupling ball bar must be

locked and the key removed.

9Warning

Towing a trailer is permitted only

when a coupling ball bar is fitted

correctly. If the coupling ball bar

does not engage correctly, seek

the assistance of a workshop.

Dismounting the coupling ball bar

Open the protective flap and turn the

key to position c to unlock the

coupling ball bar.

Pull out rotary handle and turn

clockwise as far as it will go. Pull out

coupling ball bar downwards.

Insert sealing plug in opening.

Fold away connecting socket.

On Sports Tourer insert cover into

rear bumper as shown in the

illustration.

Driving and operating 221

Stow the coupling ball bar in the bag

and secure by fixing the strap through

the rear right lashing eye. Wrap

around twice and tighten the strap to

secure the bag.

Trailer stability assist

If the system detects snaking

movements, engine power is reduced

and the vehicle/trailer combination is

selectively braked until the snaking

ceases. While system is working keep

steering wheel as still as possible.

Trailer stability assist is a function of

the Electronic Stability Control 3 174.

222 Vehicle care

Vehicle care

General Information ................... 222

Accessories and vehicle

modifications .......................... 222

Vehicle storage ........................ 223

End-of-life vehicle recovery ..... 223

Vehicle checks ........................... 224

Performing work ...................... 224

Bonnet ..................................... 224

Engine oil ................................. 225

Engine coolant ......................... 226

Washer fluid ............................ 227

Brakes ..................................... 227

Brake fluid ............................... 227

Vehicle battery ......................... 228

Diesel fuel system bleeding ..... 229

Wiper blade replacement ........ 230

Bulb replacement ....................... 230

Halogen headlights .................. 230

Front fog lights ......................... 232

Tail lights ................................. 233

Side turn lights ......................... 239

Number plate light ................... 240

Interior lights ............................ 240

Electrical system ........................ 241

Fuses ....................................... 241

Engine compartment fuse box . 242

Instrument panel fuse box ....... 244

Load compartment fuse box .... 245

Vehicle tools .............................. 247

Tools ........................................ 247

Wheels and tyres ....................... 249

Winter tyres ............................. 249

Tyre designations .................... 249

Tyre pressure .......................... 249

Tyre pressure monitoring

system .................................... 251

Tread depth ............................. 253

Changing tyre and wheel size . 254

Wheel covers ........................... 254

Tyre chains .............................. 255

Tyre repair kit .......................... 255

Wheel changing ....................... 258

Spare wheel ............................ 259

Jump starting ............................. 263

Towing ....................................... 265

Towing the vehicle ................... 265

Towing another vehicle ........... 266

Appearance care ....................... 267

Exterior care ............................ 267

Interior care ............................. 269

Floor mats ............................... 269

General Information

Accessories and vehicle

modifications

We recommend the use of genuine

parts and accessories and factory

approved parts specific for your

vehicle type. We cannot assess or

guarantee reliability of other products

- even if they have a regulatory or

otherwise granted approval.

Any modification, conversion or other

changes made to standard vehicle

specifications (including, without

limitation, software modifications,

modifications of the electronic control

units) may invalidate the warranty

offered by Opel. Furthermore, such

changes may affect driver assistance

systems, fuel consumption, CO2

emissions and other emissions of the

vehicle. They may also invalidate the

vehicle operating permit.

Vehicle care 223

Caution

When transporting the vehicle on

a train or on a recovery vehicle, the

mud flaps might be damaged.

Number plate mounting

To ensure a proper functionality of the

radar system, do not use a number

plate support on the front bumper.

Vehicle storage

Storage for a long period of time

If the vehicle is to be stored for several

months:

● Wash and wax the vehicle.

● Have the wax in the engine

compartment and underbody

checked.

● Clean and preserve the rubber

seals.

● Fill up fuel tank completely.

● Change the engine oil.

● Drain the washer fluid reservoir.

● Check the coolant antifreeze and

corrosion protection.

● Adjust tyre pressure to the value

specified for full load.

● Park the vehicle in a dry, well

ventilated place. Engage first or

reverse gear or set selector lever

to P. Prevent the vehicle from

rolling.

● Do not apply the parking brake.

● Open the bonnet, close all doors

and lock the vehicle.

● Disconnect the clamp from the

negative terminal of the vehicle

battery. Note that all systems are

not functional, e.g. anti-theft

alarm system.

Putting back into operation

When the vehicle is to be put back into

operation:

● Connect the clamp to the

negative terminal of the vehicle

battery. Initialize the power

windows 3 43.

● Check tyre pressure.

● Fill up the washer fluid reservoir.

● Check the engine oil level.

● Check the coolant level.

● Fit the number plate if necessary.

Number plate mounting 3 222.

End-of-life vehicle recovery

Information on end-of-life vehicle

recovery centres and the recycling of

end-of-life vehicles is available on our

website, where legally required. Only

entrust this work to an authorised

recycling centre.

224 Vehicle care

Vehicle checks

Performing work

9Warning

Only perform engine compartment

checks when the ignition is off.

The cooling fan may start

operating even if the ignition is off.

9Danger

The ignition system uses

extremely high voltage. Do not

touch.

Bonnet

Opening

Pull the bonnet release lever and

return it to its original position.

Move the safety catch sideways to the

left vehicle side and open the bonnet.

Secure the bonnet support.

Vehicle care 225

If the bonnet is opened during an

Autostop, the engine will be restarted

automatically for safety reasons.

Closing

Before closing the bonnet, press the

support into the holder.

Lower the bonnet and let it fall into the

latch from a low height (20-25 cm).

Check that the bonnet is engaged.

Caution

Do not press the bonnet into the

latch to avoid dents.

Engine oil

Check the engine oil level manually

on a regular basis to prevent damage

to the engine. Ensure that the correct

specification of oil is used.

Recommended fluids and lubricants

3 273.

The maximum engine oil

consumption is 0.6 l per 1000 km.

Check with the vehicle on a level

surface. The engine must be at

operating temperature and switched

off for at least 5 minutes.

Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean,

reinsert fully, pull out and read the

engine oil level.

Different dipsticks are used

depending on engine variant.

226 Vehicle care

When the engine oil level has

dropped to the MIN mark, top up

engine oil.

The engine oil level must not exceed

the MAX mark on the dipstick.

We recommend the use of the same

grade of engine oil that was used at

last change.

Caution

Wipe off any spilled engine oil

immediately.

Caution

Overfilled engine oil must be

drained or suctioned out. If the oil

exceeds the maximum level, do

not start the vehicle and contact a

workshop.

Capacities 3 283.

Fit the cap on straight and tighten it.

Engine coolant

The factory filled coolant provides

freeze protection down to approx.

-28 °C. In cold regions with very low

temperatures, the factory filled

coolant provides frost protection

down to approx. -37 °C.

Caution

Only use approved antifreeze.

Coolant and antifreeze 3 273.

Coolant level

Caution

Too low a coolant level can cause

engine damage.

If the cooling system is cold, the

coolant level should be above the

filling line mark. Top up if the level is

low.

9Warning

Allow the engine to cool before

opening the cap. Carefully open

the cap, relieving the pressure

slowly.

To top up, use a 1:1 mixture of

released coolant concentrate mixed

with clean tap water. If no coolant

concentrate is available, use clean

tap water. Install the cap tightly. Have

Vehicle care 227

the coolant concentration checked

and have the cause of the coolant

loss remedied by a workshop.

Washer fluid

Fill with clean water mixed with a

suitable quantity of approved

windscreen washer fluid which

contains antifreeze.

Caution

Only washer fluid with a sufficient

antifreeze concentration provides

protection at low temperatures or

a sudden drop in temperature.

Washer fluid 3 273.

Brakes

In the event of minimum thickness of

the brake lining, a squealing noise

sounds during braking.

Continued driving is possible but

have the brake lining replaced as

soon as possible.

Once new brake linings are installed,

do not brake unnecessarily hard for

the first few journeys.

Brake fluid

9Warning

Brake fluid is poisonous and

corrosive. Avoid contact with eyes,

skin, fabrics and painted surfaces.

The brake fluid level must be between

the MIN and MAX marks.

If fluid level is below MIN seek the

assistance of a workshop.

Brake and clutch fluid 3 273.

228 Vehicle care

Vehicle battery

The vehicle battery is located in the

load compartment.

There are connecting points for jump

starting 3 263.

The vehicle battery is maintenance-

free provided that the driving profile

allows sufficient charging of the

battery. Short-distance-driving and

frequent engine starts can discharge

the battery. Avoid the use of

unnecessary electrical consumers.

Batteries do not belong in household

waste. They must be disposed of at

an appropriate recycling collection

point.

Laying up the vehicle for more than

four weeks can lead to battery

discharge. Disconnect the clamp from

the negative terminal of the vehicle

battery.

Ensure the ignition is switched off

before connecting or disconnecting

the vehicle battery.

Battery discharge protection 3 140.

Disconnecting the battery

If the vehicle's battery is to be

disconnected (e.g. for maintenance

work), the alarm siren must be

deactivated as follows: Switch the

ignition on then off, then disconnect

the vehicle's battery within

15 seconds.

Replacing the vehicle battery

Note

Any deviation from the instructions

given in this section may lead to

temporary deactivation or

disturbance of the stop-start system.

When the vehicle battery is being

replaced, please ensure that there

are no open ventilation holes in the

vicinity of the positive terminal. If a

ventilation hole is open in this area, it

must be closed off with a dummy cap,

and the ventilation in the vicinity of the

negative terminal must be opened.

Ensure that the battery is always

replaced by the same type of battery.

The vehicle battery has to be

replaced by a workshop.

Stop-start system 3 157.

Charging the vehicle battery

9Warning

On vehicles with stop-start

system, ensure that the charging

potential does not exceed 14.6 V

Vehicle care 229

when using a battery charger.

Otherwise the vehicle battery may

be damaged.

Jump starting 3 263.

Discharge protection

Battery voltage

When the vehicle battery voltage is

running low, a warning message will

appear in the Driver Information

Centre.

When the vehicle is being driven, the

load reduction function temporarily

deactivates certain functions, e.g. the

heated rear window.

The deactivated functions are

reactivated automatically as soon as

conditions permit.

Idle boost

If charging of the vehicle battery is

required due to battery condition, the

power output of the generator must

be increased. This will be achieved by

an idle boost which may be audible.

A message appears in the Driver

Information Centre.

Power outlet

The power outlets are deactivated in

the event of low vehicle battery

voltage.

Warning label

Meaning of symbols:

● No sparks, naked flames or

smoking.

● Always shield eyes. Explosive

gases can cause blindness or

injury.

● Keep the vehicle battery out of

reach of children.

● The vehicle battery contains

sulphuric acid which could cause

blindness or serious burn

injuries.

● See the Owner's Manual for

further information.

● Explosive gas may be present in

the vicinity of the vehicle battery.

Diesel fuel system bleeding

If the tank has been run dry, the diesel

fuel system must be bled. Switch on

the ignition three times for

15 seconds at a time. Then crank the

engine for a maximum of

40 seconds. Repeat this process after

no less than 5 seconds. If the engine

fails to start, seek the assistance of a

workshop.

230 Vehicle care

Wiper blade replacement

Windscreen

Lift the wiper arm until it stays in the

raised position, press button to

disengage the wiper blade and

remove.

Attach the wiper blade slightly angled

to the wiper arm and push until it

engages.

Lower wiper arm carefully.

Rear window

Lift wiper arm. Disengage wiper blade

as shown in illustration and remove.

Attach the wiper blade slightly angled

to the wiper arm and push until it

engages.

Lower wiper arm carefully.

Bulb replacement

Switch off the ignition and switch off

the relevant switch or close the doors.

Only hold a new bulb at the base. Do

not touch the bulb glass with bare

hands.

Use only the same bulb type for

replacement.

Replace headlight bulbs from within

the engine compartment.

Bulb check

After a bulb replacement switch on

the ignition, operate and check the

lights.

Halogen headlights

Halogen headlights with separate

bulbs for low beam and high beam.

Vehicle care 231

Low beam (1) outer bulb.

High beam (2) inner bulb.

Low beam (1)

1. Rotate the cap anticlockwise and

remove it.

2. Disengage spring clip from

retainer by pulling. Withdraw the

bulb holder from the reflector

housing.

3. Detach the bulb from the bulb

holder and replace the bulb.

4. Insert the bulb holder, engaging

the two lugs into the reflector

housing and rotate clockwise to

secure.

5. Push spring clip back in place.

6. Fit the cap and rotate clockwise.

232 Vehicle care

High beam (2)

1. Rotate the cap anticlockwise and

remove it.

2. Disengage spring clip from

retainer by moving it forward and

to the side. Swivel spring clip

downwards.

3. Withdraw the bulb holder from the

reflector housing.

4. Detach the bulb from the bulb

holder and replace the bulb.

5. Insert the bulb holder and install

spring clip.

Fit the cap and rotate clockwise.

Front turn lights

In case of defective LEDs, have them

replaced by a workshop.

Side light

In case of defective LEDs, have them

replaced by a workshop.

Daytime running light

In case of defective LEDs, have them

replaced by a workshop.

Front fog lights

The bulbs are accessible from the

underside of the vehicle.

1. Undo screw with a screwdriver

and remove the faceplate.

Vehicle care 233

2. Disengage the plug connector by

pressing the retaining lug.

3. Remove and replace the bulb unit

and attach the plug connector.

Note that the bulb and the socket

are one unit and have to be

changed together.

4. Insert the bulb socket into the light

assembly by turning clockwise

and engage.

5. Mount the light assembly by

tightening the screws.

6. Attach the faceplate and tighten

the screw.

Tail lights

5-door Hatchback

1. Release the cover on the

respective side and remove it.

2. Vehicles with tyre repair kit: To

replace bulbs on the right side,

first unscrew the plastic nut and

take out the insert with the sealant

bottle.

3. Unscrew the plastic securing nut

from the inside by hand.

234 Vehicle care

4. Carefully withdraw tail light

assembly from recess and

remove.

5. Detach the cable from the

retainer.

6. Press the three retaining lugs and

remove the bulb carrier from the

light assembly.

7. Remove and replace the bulbs:

Turn light (1)

Tail light/brake light (2)

On version with LED tail lights and

LED brake lights, only turn light

bulb (1) can be removed and

replaced.

8. Attach the bulb carrier to the light

assembly.

9. Attach the cable to the retainer.

10. Attach the light assembly to the

vehicle body and tighten the

securing nut from the inside of the

load compartment. Attach cover.

Depending on the version, tail lights

and brake lights are designed as

LEDs. In case of failure, have LEDs

replaced by a workshop.

Vehicle care 235

Light assembly in the tailgate

1. Release the cover in the tailgate

and remove it.

2. Unscrew the plastic securing nut

by hand.

3. Carefully withdraw the light

assembly from the recesses and

remove.

4. Detach the plug from the light

assembly.

5. Press the three retaining lugs and

remove the bulb carrier from the

light assembly.

236 Vehicle care

On version with LED tail lights, the

position of the retaining lugs is

slightly different.

6. Remove and replace the bulb:

Tail light (1)

Rear fog light (2) (left side)

Reverse light (2) (right side)

On version with LED tail lights

only reverse light bulb (1) can be

removed and replaced.

7. Insert the bulb carrier into the tail

light assembly. Attach plug to the

light assembly. Fit light assembly

on the tailgate and tighten the

screw from the inside. Attach

cover.

Depending on the version, tail lights

are designed as LEDs. In case of

failure, have LEDs replaced by a

workshop.

Sports Tourer

1. Release and open the cover on

the respective side.

Vehicle care 237

2. Unscrew both plastic securing

nuts from the inside by hand.

3. Carefully withdraw tail light

assembly from recess and

remove.

4. Detach the cable from the

retainer.

5. Standard tail lights:

Release the retaining lugs and

remove the bulb carrier from the

light assembly.

6. Remove and replace the bulbs:

Tail light / brake light (1)

Turn light (2)

7. Insert the bulb carrier into the light

assembly.

8. LED tail lights:

On version with LED tail lights and

LED brake lights, only the turn

light bulb can be replaced:

remove bulb holder in the light

assembly by turning. Replace

bulb in the bulb holder.

238 Vehicle care

9. Attach the cable to the retainer.

10. Attach the light assembly to the

vehicle body and tighten the

securing nuts from the inside of

the load compartment. Attach

cover.

Depending on the version, tail lights

and brake lights are designed as

LEDs. In case of failure, have LEDs

replaced by a workshop.

Light assembly in the tailgate

1. Release the cover in the tailgate

and remove it.

2. Unscrew the plastic securing nut

by hand.

3. Carefully withdraw the light

assembly from the recesses and

remove.

4. Press the three retaining lugs and

remove the bulb carrier from the

light assembly.

5. Remove and replace the bulb:

Vehicle care 239

Reverse light (1)

Tail light (2)

Rear fog light (3) (left side)

6. Insert the bulb carrier into the tail

light assembly.

7. On version with LED tail lights

only reverse light bulb can be

replaced: remove bulb holder in

the light assembly by turning.

Replace bulb in the bulb holder.

8. Fit light assembly on the tailgate

and tighten the securing nut from

the inside. Attach cover.

Depending on the version, tail lights

are designed as LEDs. In case of

failure, have LEDs replaced by a

workshop.

Side turn lights

To replace bulb, remove lamp

housing:

1. Slide the lamp housing forward

and remove it at the back.

2. Turn bulb holder anticlockwise

and remove from housing.

3. Pull bulb from bulb holder and

replace it.

240 Vehicle care

4. Insert bulb holder and turn

clockwise.

5. Insert left end of the lamp, slide to

the left and insert right end.

Number plate light

1. Insert screwdriver in recess of the

cover, press to the side and

release spring.

2. Remove lamp downwards, taking

care not to pull on the cable.

3. Remove bulb holder from lamp

housing by turning anticlockwise.

4. Pull bulb from bulb holder and

replace it.

5. Insert bulb holder into lamp

housing and turn clockwise.

6. Insert lamp into bumper and let

engage.

Some versions have LED number

plate lights. In case of defective

LEDs, have them replaced by a

workshop.

Interior lights

Have the following bulbs replaced by

a workshop:

● courtesy light, reading lights

● load compartment light

● instrument panel illumination

Vehicle care 241

Electrical system

Fuses

Data on the replacement fuse must

match the data on the defective fuse.

There are three fuse boxes in the

vehicle:

● engine compartment

● instrument panel

● load compartment

Before replacing a fuse, turn off the

respective switch and the ignition.

A blown fuse can be recognized by its

melted wire.

Caution

Do not replace the fuse until the

cause of the fault has been

remedied.

Some functions are protected by

several fuses.

Fuses may also be inserted without

existence of a function.

Fuse extractor

A fuse extractor may be located in the

fuse box in the engine compartment.

The extractor has two sides, each

side is designed for a different type of

fuses.

Grab the fuse with the fuse extractor

and withdraw the fuse.

242 Vehicle care

Engine compartment fuse

box

The fuse box is in the front left of the

engine compartment.

Disengage the cover and remove it.

No. Circuit

1Starter

2Starter

3Exhaust sensor

4Engine control module

5Engine functions / Aeroshutter

6Transmission control module

7Forward collision alert / Adap‐

tive Cruise Control

8Engine control module

9Climate control system

10 Diesel exhaust system

11 Tailgate locking system / Trans‐

mission

12 Seat lumbar massage

13 After boil pump / Diesel Exhaust

system

14 Diesel exhaust system

15 Exhaust sensor

Vehicle care 243

No. Circuit

16 Fuel injection

17 Fuel injection

18 Diesel exhaust system

19 –

20 –

21 –

22 ABS

23 Washer system for windscreen

and rear window

24 –

25 Diesel fuel heating

26 Transmission control module

27 Power tailgate module

28 –

29 Heated rear window

30 Mirror defrost

31 –

No. Circuit

32 DC transformer / LED display /

Electrical heater / Climate

control / Glow plug controller

33 –

34 Horn

35 Engine control module

36 Right high beam (Halogen, Eco

LED) / Right low beam (LED)

37 Left high beam (Halogen, Eco

LED)

38 LED headlight / Automatic

headlight range adjustment

39 Front fog light

40 Central Gateway Module

41 –

42 Manual headlight range adjust‐

ment

43 Fuel pump

44 Rear view camera / Inside rear

view mirror / Trailer module

No. Circuit

45 LED headlight left / Automatic

headlight range adjustment left

46 Instrument cluster

47 Steering column lock

48 Rear wiper

49 Outside rearview mirror

50 LED headlight right / Automatic

headlight range adjustment

right

51 Left low beam (LED)

52 Engine control module / Trans‐

mission control module

53 Windscreen wiper

54 Windscreen wiper

55 Diesel Exhaust system

56 –

57 –

After having changed defective fuses,

close the fuse box cover and press

until it engages.

244 Vehicle care

If the fuse box cover is not closed

correctly, malfunction may occur.

Instrument panel fuse box

The fuse box is located behind a

cover.

Pull the cover on the left side to

remove.

No. Circuit

1Rear seat heating (only for vehi‐

cles without alarm horn)

2Climate control system / fan

3Power seat driver side

4Power seat passenger side

5ABS

6Power window front

7–

8Heated steering wheel

9Body control module 8

10 Power window rear

11 Sunroof

12 Body control module 6

13 Seat heating (only on vehicles

without alarm horn)

14 Exterior mirror

15 Body control module 1

16 Body control module 7

Vehicle care 245

No. Circuit

17 Body control module 4

18 Body control module 3

19 Data link connector

20 Airbag system

21 Climate control system

22 Central locking system / tailgate

23 Electronic key system

24 Power seat memory function

25 Airbag system steering wheel

26 Ignition switch / Steering

column lock

27 Body control module 2

28 USB socket

29 Cigarette lighter / Power outlet

front

30 Selector lever

31 Rear window wiper

32 Transmission control module

No. Circuit

33 Anti-theft alarm system / Power

sounder

34 Parking assist / Side blind spot

alert / Infotainment system /

USB socket

35 SOS

36 Info Display / Instrument cluster

37 Infotainment system / radio

After having changed defective fuses,

close the fuse box cover:

1. Apply the cover on the right side.

2. Fold the left side of the cover

forwards. Take care that the

securing clamp is guided as

shown in the illustration.

Load compartment fuse box

The fuse box is located on the left side

of the load compartment behind a

cover.

Remove the cover.

246 Vehicle care

Disengage the fuse box cover and

remove it.

No. Circuit

1–

2–

3Trailer module

4–

5–

6–

7–

8–

9–

10 –

11 Amplifier

12 Front seat heating (on vehicles

with alarm horn)

13 Rear seat heating (on vehicles

with alarm horn)

14 Ignition

15 Seat ventilation

16 Trailer outlet

Vehicle care 247

No. Circuit

17 Trailer outlet

18 –

19 –

20 –

21 Electrical rear seat folding

22 –

After having changed defective fuses,

close the fuse box cover and press

until it engages.

Additional fuses are located near the

vehicle battery.

No. Circuit

1Engine control module

2Fuel pump

3Power supply

Vehicle tools

Tools

5-door hatchback with spare

wheel

Open the floor cover of the load

compartment 3 82.

The jack, the towing eye and the tools

are located in the tool box below the

spare wheel.

Spare wheel 3 259.

248 Vehicle care

Sports Tourer with spare wheel

Open the floor cover of the load

compartment 3 82.

The jack, the towing eye and the tools

are located in the tool box below the

spare wheel.

Spare wheel 3 259.

5-door hatchback without spare

wheel

Open the cover in the right side wall

of the load compartment.

Some tools and the towing eye are

located together with the tyre repair

kit in a tool box.

Sports Tourer without spare

wheel

Open the cover on the right side of the

load compartment.

The tools and the towing eye are

located together with the tyre repair

kit in a suitcase.

Vehicle care 249

Wheels and tyres

Tyre condition, wheel condition

Drive over edges slowly and at right

angles if possible. Driving over sharp

edges can cause tyre and wheel

damage. Do not trap tyres on the kerb

when parking.

Regularly check the wheels for

damage. Seek the assistance of a

workshop in the event of damage or

unusual wear.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres improve driving safety at

temperatures below 7 °C and should

therefore be fitted on all wheels.

In accordance with country-specific

regulations, affix the speed sticker in

the driver's field of view.

All tyre sizes are permitted as winter

tyres 3 285.

Tyre designations

E.g. 215/50 R 16 95 H

215 : Tyre width, mm

50 : Cross-section ratio (tyre height

to tyre width), %

R: Belt type: Radial

RF : Type: RunFlat

16 : Wheel diameter, inches

95 : Load index e.g. 95 is

equivalent to 690 kg

H: Speed code letter

Speed code letter:

Q: up to 160 km/h

S: up to 180 km/h

T: up to 190 km/h

H: up to 210 km/h

V: up to 240 km/h

W: up to 270 km/h

Choose a tyre appropriate for the

maximum speed of this vehicle. Refer

to the EEC Certificate of Conformity

provided with the vehicle or other

national registration documents.

Optional equipment could reduce the

maximum speed of the vehicle.

Directional tyres

Directional tyres should be mounted

so that they rotate in the correct

direction. The proper rotation

direction is indicated by a symbol

(e.g. an arrow) on the sidewall.

Tyre pressure

Check the pressure of cold tyres at

least every 14 days and before any

long journey. Do not forget the spare

wheel.

This also applies to vehicles with tyre

pressure monitoring system.

Tyre pressure 3 285.

250 Vehicle care

The tyre pressure information label

on the left door frame indicates the

original equipment tyres and the

correspondent tyre pressures.

The tyre pressure data refers to cold

tyres. It applies to summer and winter

tyres.

Always inflate the spare tyre to the

pressure specified for full load.

The ECO tyre pressure serves to

achieve the smallest amount of fuel

consumption possible.

Make sure tyre loading setting

matches the current tyre pressure.

Tyre loading 3 251.

Incorrect tyre pressures will impair

safety, vehicle handling, comfort and

fuel economy and will increase tyre

wear.

Tyre pressures differ depending on

various options.

For the correct tyre pressure value,

follow the procedure below:

● Identify the engine identifier

code.

Engine data 3 280.

● Identify the respective tyre.

● The tyre pressure tables show all

possible tyre combinations

3 285.

For the tyres approved for your

vehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate of

Conformity provided with your vehicle

or other national registration

documents.

The driver is responsible for correct

adjustment of tyre pressure.

9Warning

If the pressure is too low, this can

result in considerable tyre warm-

up and internal damage, leading to

tread separation and even to tyre

blow-out at high speeds.

9Warning

For specific tyres the

recommended tyre pressure as

shown in the tyre pressure table

may exceed the maximum tyre

pressure as indicated on the tyre.

Never exceed the maximum tyre

pressure as indicated on the tyre.

If the tyre pressure must be reduced

or increased on a vehicle with tyre

pressure monitoring system, switch

off ignition.

Temperature dependency

The tyre pressure depends on the

temperature of the tyre. During

driving, tyre temperature and

pressure increase. Tyre pressure

values provided on the tyre

information label and tyre pressure

chart are valid for cold tyres, which

means at 20 °C.

The pressure increases by nearly

10 kPa for a 10 °C temperature

increase. This must be considered

when warm tyres are checked.

The tyre pressure value displayed in

the Driver Information Centre shows

the real tyre pressure. A cooled down

tyre will show a decreased value,

which does not indicate an air leak.

Vehicle care 251

Tyre pressure monitoring

system

The tyre pressure monitoring system

checks the pressure of all four tyres

once a minute when vehicle speed

exceeds a certain limit.

Caution

Tyre pressure monitoring system

warns only about low tyre pressure

condition and does not replace

regular tyre maintenance by the

driver.

All wheels must be equipped with

pressure sensors and the tyres must

have the prescribed pressure.

Note

In countries where the tyre pressure

monitoring system is legally

required, the use of wheels without

pressure sensors will invalidate the

vehicle operating permit.

The current tyre pressures can be

shown in the Driver Information

Centre.

Midlevel display:

Select the Tyre pressure page under

the Vehicle Information Menu ? in

the Driver Information Centre 3 115.

Uplevel display:

Select the Tyre pressure page under

the Info Menu in the Driver

Information Centre 3 115.

System status and pressure warnings

are displayed by a message

indicating the corresponding tyre in

the Driver Information Centre.

The system considers the tyre

temperature for the warnings.

Temperature dependency 3 249.

A detected low tyre pressure

condition is indicated by the control

indicator w 3 112.

If w illuminates, stop as soon as

possible and inflate the tyres as

recommended 3 285.

If w flashes for 60-90 seconds then

illuminates continuously, there is a

fault in the system. Consult a

workshop.

252 Vehicle care

After inflating, some driving may be

required to update the tyre pressure

values in the Driver Information

Centre. During this time w may

illuminate.

If w illuminates at lower temperatures

and extinguishes after driving, this

could be an indicator for approaching

a low tyre pressure condition. Check

tyre pressure.

Vehicle messages 3 122.

If the tyre pressure must be reduced

or increased, switch off ignition.

Only mount wheels with pressure

sensors, otherwise the tyre pressure

will not be displayed and w

illuminates continuously.

A spare wheel or temporary spare

wheel is not equipped with pressure

sensors. The tyre pressure

monitoring system is not operational

for these tyres. Control indicator w

illuminates. For the further three

tyres, the system remains

operational.

The use of commercially-available

liquid tyre repair kits can impair the

function of the system. Factory-

approved repair kits can be used.

Operating electronic devices or being

close to facilities using similar wave

frequencies could disrupt the tyre

pressure monitoring system.

Each time the tyres are replaced, tyre

pressure monitoring system sensors

must be dismounted and serviced.

For the screwed sensor, replace

valve core and sealing ring. For the

clipped sensor, replace complete

valve stem.

Use only original plastic valve caps to

protect valve on any damage.

Caution

Do not use metal valve caps as

they lead to valve oxidation and

damage.

Vehicle loading status

Adjust tyre pressure to load condition

according to the tyre information label

or tyre pressure chart 3 285, and

select the appropriate setting in Tyre

Load within the Vehicle Information

Menu 3 115. This setting determines

the reference pressures for the tyre

pressure warnings.

The Tyre Load menu only appears

when the vehicle is at a standstill and

the parking brake is applied. On

vehicles with automatic transmission

the selector lever must be in P.

Midlevel display:

Select the Tyre load page under the

Vehicle Information Menu ? in the

Driver Information Centre 3 115.

Vehicle care 253

Select

●Light for comfort pressure up to

three people.

●Eco for Eco pressure up to three

people.

●Max for full loading.

Uplevel display:

Select the Tyre load page under the

Options Menu in the Driver

Information Centre 3 115.

Select

●Light for comfort pressure up to

three people.

●Eco for Eco pressure up to

three people.

●Max for full loading.

Auto learn function

After changing wheels or wheel

positions the vehicle must be

stationary for approx. 20 minutes,

before the system recalculates. The

following relearn process takes up to

10 minutes of driving in a speed range

of 40 to 100 km/h. Avoid to drive

outside of this range for a longer time.

If possible, use a country road or

similar which allows continuous

driving. During relearn process $

can be displayed or pressure values

can swap in the Driver Information

Centre.

Ensure the tyre loading status is set

according to the selected pressure

3 115.

If problems occur during the relearn

process, a failure message is

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre. w will flash for 60 seconds

and then illuminate continuously.

If this happens, repeat learning

process. Keep your vehicle stationary

for approx. 20 minutes and then drive

again for 10 minutes as described

above.

Tread depth

Check tread depth at regular

intervals.

Tyres should be replaced for safety

reasons at a tread depth of 2-3 mm

(4 mm for winter tyres).

For safety reasons, it is

recommended that the tread depth of

the tyres on one axle should not vary

by more than 2 mm.

254 Vehicle care

The legally permissible minimum

tread depth (1.6 mm) has been

reached when the tread has worn

down as far as one of the tread wear

indicators (TWI). Their position is

indicated by markings on the

sidewall.

If there is more wear at the front than

the rear, swap round front wheels and

rear wheels periodically. Ensure that

the direction of rotation of the wheels

remains the same.

Tyres age, even if they are not used.

We recommend tyre replacement

every 6 years.

Changing tyre and wheel

size

If tyres of a different size than those

fitted at the factory are used, it may be

necessary to reprogramme the

nominal tyre pressure and make

other vehicle modifications.

After converting to a different tyre

size, have the label with tyre

pressures replaced and the tyre

pressure monitoring system

reinitialised 3 251.

9Warning

The use of unsuitable tyres or

wheels may lead to accidents and

will invalidate the vehicle

operating permit.

Wheel covers

Wheel covers and tyres that are

factory approved for the respective

vehicle and comply with all of the

relevant wheel and tyre combination

requirements must be used.

If the wheel covers and tyres used are

not factory approved, the tyres must

not have a rim protection ridge.

Wheel covers must not impair brake

cooling.

9Warning

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel

covers could lead to sudden

pressure loss and thereby

accidents.

Vehicles with steel wheels: When

using locking wheel nuts, do not

attach wheel covers.

Vehicle care 255

Tyre chains

Tyre chains are only permitted on the

front wheels.

Always use fine mesh chains that add

no more than 10 mm to the tyre tread

and the inboard sides (including chain

lock).

9Warning

Damage may lead to tyre blowout.

Tyre chains are permitted on tyres of

size 195/65 R15, 205/55 R16 and

215/55 R16.

Temporary spare wheel

The use of tyre chains is not permitted

on the temporary spare wheel.

Tyre repair kit

Minor damage to the tyre tread can be

repaired with the tyre repair kit.

Do not remove foreign bodies from

the tyres.

Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or that

is at tyre's sidewall cannot be repaired

with the tyre repair kit.

9Warning

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h.

Do not use for a lengthy period.

Steering and handling may be

affected.

If vehicle has a flat tyre:

Apply the parking brake and engage

first gear, reverse gear or P.

On 5-door hatchback the tyre repair

kit is on the right side in the load

compartment behind a cover.

256 Vehicle care

On Sports Tourer the tyre repair kit is

in a suitcase on the right side of the

load compartment behind a cover.

The suitcase is secured with a strap.

1. Remove the sealant bottle.

2. Insert thumb into the opening and

pull out the compressor.

3. Remove the electrical connection

cable and air hose from the

stowage compartments on the

underside of the compressor.

4. Screw the compressor air hose to

the connection on the sealant

bottle.

5. Fit the sealant bottle into the

retainer on the compressor.

Set the compressor near the tyre

in such a way that the sealant

bottle is upright.

6. Unscrew valve cap from defective

tyre.

7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre

valve.

8. The switch on the compressor

must be set to J.

9. Connect the compressor plug to

the power outlet or cigarette

lighter socket.

To avoid discharging the battery,

we recommend running the

engine.

Vehicle care 257

10. Set the rocker switch on the

compressor to I. The tyre is filled

with sealant.

11. The compressor pressure gauge

briefly indicates up to 6 bar whilst

the sealant bottle is emptying

(approx. 30 seconds). Then the

pressure starts to drop.

12. All of the sealant is pumped into

the tyre. Then the tyre is inflated.

13. The prescribed tyre pressure

should be obtained within

10 minutes.

Tyre pressure 3 285.

When the correct pressure is

obtained, switch off the

compressor.

If the prescribed tyre pressure is

not obtained within 10 minutes,

remove the tyre repair kit. Move

the vehicle one tyre rotation.

Reattach the tyre repair kit and

continue the filling procedure for

10 minutes. If the prescribed tyre

pressure is still not obtained, the

tyre is too badly damaged. Seek

the assistance of a workshop.

Drain excess tyre pressure with

the button over the pressure

indicator.

Depending on version the button

can be located on the air hose.

Do not run the compressor longer

than 10 minutes.

14. Detach the tyre repair kit. Push

catch on bracket to remove

sealant bottle from bracket. Screw

the tyre inflation hose to the free

connection of the sealant bottle.

This prevents sealant from

escaping. Stow tyre repair kit in

load compartment.

15. Remove any excess sealant

using a cloth.

258 Vehicle care

16. Take the label indicating

maximum permitted speed from

the sealant bottle and affix in the

driver's field of view.

17. Continue driving immediately so

that sealant is evenly distributed

in the tyre. After driving approx.

10 km (but no more than

10 minutes), stop and check tyre

pressure. Screw compressor air

hose directly onto tyre valve and

compressor when doing this.

If tyre pressure is more than

1.3 bar, set it to the correct value.

Repeat the procedure until there

is no more loss of pressure.

If the tyre pressure has fallen

below 1.3 bar, the vehicle must

not be used. Seek the assistance

of a workshop.

18. Stow away tyre repair kit in load

compartment.

Note

The driving characteristics of the

repaired tyre are severely affected,

therefore have this tyre replaced.

If unusual noise is heard or the

compressor becomes hot, turn

compressor off for at least

30 minutes.

The built-in safety valve opens at a

pressure of 7 bar.

Note the expiry date of the kit. After

this date its sealing capability is no

longer guaranteed. Pay attention to

storage information on sealant

bottle.

Replace the used sealant bottle.

Dispose of the bottle as prescribed

by applicable laws.

The compressor and sealant can be

used from approx. -30 °C.

The adapters possibly supplied can

be used to pump up other items e.g.

footballs, air mattresses, inflatable

dinghies etc. They can be located on

the underside of the compressor. To

remove, screw on compressor air

hose and withdraw adapter.

Wheel changing

Make the following preparations and

observe the following information:

● Park the vehicle on a level, firm

and non-skid surface. The front

wheels must be in the straight-

ahead position.

● Apply the parking brake and

engage first gear, reverse gear or

● If the ground on which the vehicle

is standing is soft, a solid board

(max. 1 cm thick) should be

placed under the jack.

● Take heavy objects out of the

vehicle before jacking up.

● No people or animals may be in

the vehicle when it is jacked-up.

● Never crawl under a jacked-up

vehicle.

Vehicle care 259

● Do not start the vehicle when it is

raised on the jack.

● Clean wheel nuts and thread with

a clean cloth before mounting the

wheel.

9Warning

Do not grease wheel bolt, wheel

nut and wheel nut cone.

Jacking positions

The jacking positions shown refer to

the use of lifting arms and accessory

jacks used for changing winter /

summer tyres.

Rear arm position of the lifting

platform centrically under the relevant

vehicle jacking point.

Front arm position of the lifting

platform centrically under the relevant

vehicle jacking point.

Spare wheel

The spare wheel can be classified as

a temporary spare wheel depending

on the size compared to the other

mounted wheels and country

regulations. In this case a permissible

maximum speed applies, even

though no label at the spare wheel

indicates this.

Only mount one temporary spare

wheel. Do not drive faster than

80 km/h. Take curves slowly. Do not

use for a long period of time.

Caution

The use of a spare wheel that is

smaller than the other wheels or in

combination with winter tyres

could affect driveability. Have the

defective tyre replaced as soon as

possible.

The spare wheel is located in the load

compartment beneath the floor

covering.

260 Vehicle care

To remove:

1. Open the floor cover 3 82.

2. The spare wheel is secured with a

wing nut. Unscrew the wing nut

and take out the spare wheel.

Under the spare wheel there is the

box with vehicle tools.

3. When, after a wheel change, no

wheel is placed in the spare wheel

well, secure the tool box by

tightening the wing nut as far as it

will go and close floor cover.

4. After wheel change back to full

size wheel, place the spare wheel

outside up in the well and secure

with the wing nut.

Only mount one temporary spare

wheel. The permissible maximum

speed on the label on the temporary

spare wheel is only valid for the

factory-fitted tyre size.

Fitting the spare wheel

Make the following preparations and

observe the following information:

● Park the vehicle on a level, firm

and non-skid surface. The front

wheels must be in the straight-

ahead position.

● Apply the parking brake and

engage first gear, reverse gear or

● Remove the spare wheel.

● Never change more than one

wheel at once.

● Use the jack only to change

wheels in case of puncture, not

for seasonal winter or summer

tyre change.

● The jack is maintenance-free.

● If the ground on which the vehicle

is standing is soft, a solid board

(max. 1 cm thick) should be

placed under the jack.

● Take heavy objects out of the

vehicle before jacking up.

● No people or animals may be in

the vehicle when it is jacked-up.

● Never crawl under a jacked-up

vehicle.

● Do not start the vehicle when it is

raised on the jack.

● Clean wheel nuts and thread with

a clean cloth before mounting the

wheel.

9Warning

Do not grease wheel bolt, wheel

nut and wheel nut cone.

1. Steel wheels with cover: Pull off

the wheel cover.

Alloy wheels: Disengage wheel

nut caps with a slot screwdriver

and remove. To protect the wheel

paint and the cap, wrap a cloth

around the screwdriver tip 3 247.

Vehicle care 261

2. Fold out the wheel wrench and

install ensuring that it locates

securely and loosen each wheel

nut by half a turn.

The wheels might be protected by

locking wheel nuts. To loosen

these specific nuts, first attach the

adapter for the locking wheel nuts

onto the head of the nut before

installing the wheel wrench. The

adapter is located in the glovebox.

3. Ensure the jack is correctly

positioned under the relevant

vehicle jacking point.

4. Set the jack to the necessary

height. Position it directly below

the jacking point in a manner that

prevents it from slipping.

Ensure that the edge of the body

fits into the notch of the jack.

262 Vehicle care

Attach wheel wrench and with the

jack correctly aligned rotate wheel

wrench until wheel is clear of the

ground.

5. Unscrew the wheel nuts.

6. Change the wheel.

7. Screw on the wheel nuts.

8. Lower the vehicle and remove

jack.

9. Install the wheel wrench ensuring

that it is located securely and

tighten each nut in a crosswise

sequence. Tightening torque is

140 Nm.

10. Align the valve hole in the wheel

cover with the tyre valve before

installing.

Install wheel nut caps.

11. Stow and secure the replaced

wheel, the vehicle tools 3 247 and

the adapter for the locking wheel

nuts 3 73.

12. Check the tyre pressure of the

installed tyre and the wheel nut

torque as soon as possible.

Have the defective tyre renewed or

repaired as soon as possible.

Stowing a damaged full size

wheel in the load compartment, 5-

door hatchback

The spare wheel well is not designed

for other tyre sizes than the spare

wheel. A damaged full size wheel

must be stowed in the load

compartment.

Vehicle tools 3 247.

Make sure to store the wheel securely

in the load compartment 3 90.

9Danger

Always drive with folded up and

engaged rear seat backrests when

stowing a damaged full size wheel

in the load compartment.

9Warning

Storing a jack, a wheel or other

equipment in the load

compartment could cause injury if

they are not fixed properly. During

a sudden stop or a collision, loose

equipment could strike someone.

Always store jack and tools in the

respective storage compartments

and secure them by fixing.

Damaged wheel placed in the load

compartment must always be

secured with the strap.

Stowing a damaged full size

wheel in the load compartment,

Sports Tourer

All permitted wheel sizes can be

stowed in the spare wheel well. To

secure the wheel:

Vehicle care 263

1. Remove centre cap with the brand

emblem by pushing from the

inside.

2. Position the wheel outside down

in the wheel well.

3. Secure the defective wheel with

the wing nut.

4. Depending on the tyre size, the

floor cover can be placed on the

projecting wheel.

Spare wheel with directional tyre

The following applies to tyres fitted

opposing the rolling direction:

● Driveability may be affected.

Have the defective tyre renewed

or repaired as soon as possible

and fit it instead of the spare

wheel.

● Drive particularly carefully on wet

and snow-covered road

surfaces.

Jump starting

A vehicle with a discharged vehicle

battery can be started using jump

leads and the vehicle battery of

another vehicle.

Do not start with quick charger.

The vehicle battery is located in the

load compartment under a cover.

There are connecting points for jump

starting in the engine compartment.

9Warning

Be extremely careful when starting

with jump leads. Any deviation

from the following instructions can

lead to injuries or damage caused

by battery explosion or damage to

the electrical systems of both

vehicles.

9Warning

Avoid contact of the battery with

eyes, skin, fabrics and painted

surfaces. The fluid contains

264 Vehicle care

sulphuric acid which can cause

injuries and damage in the event

of direct contact.

● Never expose the vehicle battery

to naked flames or sparks.

● A discharged vehicle battery can

already freeze at a temperature

of 0 °C. Defrost the frozen vehicle

battery before connecting jump

leads.

● Wear eye protection and

protective clothing when

handling a vehicle battery.

● Use a booster vehicle battery

with the same voltage (12 V). Its

capacity (Ah) must not be much

less than that of the discharged

vehicle battery.

● Use jump leads with insulated

terminals and a cross section of

at least 16 mm2 (25 mm2 for

diesel engines).

● Do not disconnect the discharged

vehicle battery from the vehicle.

● Switch off all unnecessary

electrical consumers.

● Do not lean over the vehicle

battery during jump starting.

● Do not allow the terminals of one

lead to touch those of the other

lead.

● The vehicles must not come into

contact with each other during

the jump starting process.

● Apply the parking brake,

transmission in neutral,

automatic transmission in P.

● Open the positive terminal

protection caps of both batteries.

Illustrations show different versions.

Lead connection order:

1. Connect the red lead to the

positive terminal of the booster

vehicle battery.

2. Connect the other end of the red

lead to the positive terminal of the

discharged vehicle battery.

3. Connect the black lead to the

negative terminal of the booster

vehicle battery.

4. Connect the other end of the black

lead to a vehicle grounding point

of your vehicle in the engine

compartment.

Vehicle care 265

Route the leads so that they cannot

catch on rotating parts in the engine

compartment.

To start the engine:

1. Start the engine of the vehicle

providing the jump.

2. After 5 minutes, start the other

engine. Start attempts should be

made for no longer than

15 seconds at an interval of one

minute.

3. Allow both engines to idle for

approx. 3 minutes with the leads

connected.

4. Switch on electrical consumers

(e.g. headlights, heated rear

window) of the vehicle receiving

the jump start.

5. Reverse above sequence exactly

when removing leads.

Towing

Towing the vehicle

Wrap a cloth around the tip of a flat

screwdriver to prevent paint damage.

Insert the screwdriver in the slot at the

edge of the cap. Release the cap by

levering it out carefully.

The towing eye is stowed with the

vehicle tools 3 247.

Screw in the towing eye as far as it will

go until it stops in a horizontal

position.

Attach a tow rope – or better still a tow

rod – to the towing eye.

The towing eye must only be used for

towing and not for recovering the

vehicle.

Switch on ignition to release steering

wheel lock and to permit operation of

brake lights, horn and windscreen

wiper.

266 Vehicle care

Caution

Deactivate the driver assistance

systems like active emergency

braking 3 190, otherwise the

vehicle may automatically brake

during towing.

Switch the selector lever to neutral.

Release the parking brake.

Caution

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.

Excessive tractive force can

damage the vehicle.

When the engine is not running,

considerably more force is needed to

brake and steer.

To prevent the entry of exhaust gases

from the towing vehicle, switch on the

air recirculation and close the

windows.

Vehicles with automatic transmission:

The vehicle must be towed facing

forwards, not faster than 80 km/h nor

further than 100 km. In all other cases

and when the transmission is

defective, the front axle must be

raised off the ground.

Seek the assistance of a workshop.

After towing, unscrew the towing eye.

Insert cap at the top and engage

downwards.

Towing another vehicle

Insert the screwdriver in the slot at the

edge of the cap. Release the cap by

levering it out carefully.

The towing eye is stowed with the

vehicle tools 3 247.

Screw in the towing eye as far as it will

go until it stops in a horizontal

position.

The lashing eye at the rear

underneath the vehicle must never be

used as a towing eye.

Attach a tow rope – or even better a

tow bar – to the towing eye.

The towing eye must only be used for

towing and not for recovering a

vehicle.

Vehicle care 267

Caution

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.

Excessive tractive force can

damage the vehicle.

After towing, unscrew the towing eye.

Insert cap at the top and engage

downwards.

Appearance care

Exterior care

Locks

The locks are lubricated at the factory

using a high quality lock cylinder

grease. Use de-icing agent only when

absolutely necessary, as this has a

degreasing effect and impairs lock

function. After using a de-icing agent,

have the locks regreased by a

workshop.

Washing

The paintwork of your vehicle is

exposed to environmental influences.

Bird droppings, dead insects, resin,

pollen and the like should be cleaned

off immediately, as they contain

aggressive constituents which can

cause paint damage.

If using a vehicle wash, comply with

the vehicle wash manufacturer's

instructions. The windscreen wiper

and rear window wiper must be

switched off. Remove antenna and

external accessories such as roof

racks etc.

If you wash your vehicle by hand,

make sure that the insides of the

wheel housings are also thoroughly

rinsed out.

Clean edges and folds on opened

doors and the bonnet as well as the

areas they cover.

Clean bright metal mouldings with a

cleaning solution approved for

aluminium to avoid damages.

Caution

Always use a cleaning agent with

a pH value of four to nine.

Do not use cleaning agents on hot

surfaces.

Do not clean the engine compartment

with a steam-jet or high-pressure jet

cleaner.

Thoroughly rinse and leather-off the

vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use

separate leathers for painted and

glass surfaces: remnants of wax on

the windows will impair vision.

268 Vehicle care

Have the door hinges of all doors

greased by a workshop.

Do not use hard objects to remove

spots of tar. Use tar removal spray on

painted surfaces.

Exterior lights

Headlight and other light covers are

made of plastic. Do not use any

abrasive or caustic agents, do not use

an ice scraper, and do not clean them

dry.

Polishing and waxing

Polishing is necessary only if the paint

has become dull or if solid deposits

have become attached to it.

Plastic body parts must not be treated

with wax or polishing agents.

Windows and windscreen wiper

blades

Switch off wipers before handling in

their areas.

Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois

leather together with window cleaner

and insect remover.

When cleaning the rear window from

inside, always wipe in parallel to the

heating element to prevent damage.

For mechanical removal of ice, use a

sharp-edged ice scraper. Press the

scraper firmly against the glass so

that no dirt can get under it and

scratch the glass.

Clean smearing wiper blades with a

soft cloth and window cleaner.

Remove dirt residues from smearing

wiper blades by using a soft cloth and

window cleaner. Also make sure to

remove any residues such as wax,

insect residues and similar from the

window.

Ice residues, pollution and continuous

wiping on dry windows will damage or

even destroy the wiper blades.

Sunroof

Never clean with solvents or abrasive

agents, fuels, aggressive media

(e.g. paint cleaner, acetone-

containing solutions etc.), acidic or

highly alkaline media or abrasive

pads. Do not apply wax or polishing

agents to the sunroof.

Wheels and tyres

Do not use high-pressure jet

cleaners.

Clean rims with a pH-neutral wheel

cleaner.

Rims are painted and can be treated

with the same agents as the body.

Paintwork damage

Rectify minor paintwork damage with

a touch-up pen before rust forms.

Have more extensive damage or rust

areas repaired by a workshop.

Underbody

Some areas of the vehicle underbody

have a PVC undercoating while other

critical areas have a durable

protective wax coating.

After the underbody is washed, check

the underbody and have it waxed if

necessary.

Bitumen / rubber materials could

damage the PVC coating. Have

underbody work carried out by a

workshop.

Vehicle care 269

Before and after winter, wash the

underbody and have the protective

wax coating checked.

Towing equipment

Do not clean the coupling ball bar with

a steam-jet or high-pressure jet

cleaner.

Air shutter

Clean the shutter system in the front

bumper to maintain correct

functionality.

Interior care

Interior and upholstery

Only clean the vehicle interior,

including the instrument panel fascia

and panelling, with a dry cloth or

interior cleaner.

Clean the leather upholstery with

clear water and a soft cloth. In case of

heavy soiling, use leather care.

The instrument cluster and the

displays should only be cleaned using

a soft damp cloth. If necessary use a

weak soap solution.

Clean fabric upholstery with a

vacuum cleaner and brush. Remove

stains with an upholstery cleaner.

Clothing fabrics may not be

colourfast. This could cause visible

discolourations, especially on light-

coloured upholstery. Removable

stains and discolourations should be

cleaned as soon as possible.

Clean seat belts with lukewarm water

or interior cleaner.

Caution

Close Velcro fasteners as open

Velcro fasteners on clothing could

damage seat upholstery.

The same applies to clothing with

sharp-edged objects, like zips or

belts or studded jeans.

Plastic and rubber parts

Plastic and rubber parts can be

cleaned with the same cleaner as

used to clean the body. Use interior

cleaner if necessary. Do not use any

other agent. Avoid solvents and petrol

in particular. Do not use high-

pressure jet cleaners.

Floor mats

9Warning

If a floor mat has the wrong size or

is not properly installed, it can

interfere with the accelerator pedal

and/or brake pedal, what can

cause unintended acceleration

and/or increased stopping

distance which can cause a crash

and injury.

Use the following guidelines for

proper floor mat usage.

● The original equipment floor mats

were designed for your vehicle. If

the floor mats need replacing, it

is recommended that certified

270 Vehicle care

floor mats be purchased. Always

check that the floor mats do not

interfere with the pedals.

● Use the floor mat with the correct

side up. Do not turn it over.

● Do not place anything on top of

the driver side floor mat.

● Use only a single floor mat on the

driver side.

● Do not place one floor mat on top

of another.

Inserting and removing the floor

mats

The driver side floor mat is held in

place by two retainers.

To install the driver's side floor mat:

1. Move the driver's seat backwards

as far as possible.

2. Align slots in the mat with the

retainers, as shown.

3. Turn retainers anti-clockwise for a

quarter turn.

1. Move the driver's seat backwards

as far as possible.

2. Align slots in the mat with the

retainers, as shown.

Vehicle care 271

3. Turn retainers clockwise for a

quarter turn.

Removing

1. Move the driver's seat backwards

as far as possible.

2. Turn retainers a quarter turn

towards the opposite direction

than during installation.

3. Remove the mat.

272 Service and maintenance

Service and

maintenance

General information ................... 272

Service information .................. 272

Recommended fluids, lubricants

and parts .................................... 273

Recommended fluids and

lubricants ................................ 273

General information

Service information

In order to ensure economical and

safe vehicle operation and to

maintain the value of your vehicle, it

is of vital importance that all

maintenance work is carried out at the

proper intervals as specified.

The detailed, up-to-date service

schedule for your vehicle is available

at the workshop.

Service display 3 107.

European service intervals

Maintenance of your vehicle is

required every 30,000 km or after one

year, whichever occurs first. Engine

oil and filter change is indicated by the

engine oil life system, when required

earlier than maintenance.

A shorter service interval can be valid

for severe driving behaviour, e.g. for

taxis and police vehicles.

The European service intervals are

valid for the following countries:

Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia-

Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia,

Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark,

Estonia, Finland, France, Germany,

Greece, Greenland, Hungary,

Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia,

Liechtenstein, Lithuania,

Luxembourg, North Macedonia,

Malta, Monaco, Montenegro,

Netherlands, Norway, Poland,

Portugal, Romania, San Marino,

Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain,

Sweden, Switzerland, United

Kingdom.

Service display 3 107.

International service intervals

Maintenance of your vehicle is

required every 15,000 km or after one

year, whichever occurs first.

Additional engine oil and filter change

is indicated by the engine oil life

system, when required earlier than

maintenance.

Severe operating conditions exist if

one or more of the following

circumstances occur frequently: Cold

starting, stop and go operation, trailer

operation, mountain driving, driving

Service and maintenance 273

on poor and sandy road surfaces,

increased air pollution, presence of

airborne sand and high dust content,

driving at high altitude and large

variations of temperature. Under

these severe operating conditions,

certain service work may be required

more frequently than the regular

service interval.

The international service intervals are

valid for the countries which are not

listed in the European service

intervals.

Service display 3 107.

Confirmations

Confirmation of service is recorded in

the Service and warranty booklet.

The date and mileage is completed

with the stamp and signature of the

servicing workshop.

Make sure that the Service and

warranty booklet is completed

correctly as continuous proof of

service is essential if any warranty or

goodwill claims are to be met. It is also

a benefit when selling the vehicle.

Recommended fluids,

lubricants and parts

Recommended fluids and

lubricants

Only use products that meet the

recommended specifications.

9Warning

Operating materials are

hazardous and could be

poisonous. Handle with care. Pay

attention to information given on

the containers.

Engine oil

Engine oil is identified by its quality

and its viscosity. Quality is more

important than viscosity when

selecting which engine oil to use. The

oil quality ensures e.g. engine

cleanliness, wear protection and oil

aging control, whereas viscosity

grade gives information on the oil's

thickness over a temperature range.

Select the appropriate engine oil

based on its quality and on the

minimum ambient temperature

3 277.

Topping up engine oil

Caution

In case of any spilled oil, wipe it up

and dispose it properly.

Engine oils of different manufacturers

and brands can be mixed as long as

they comply with the required engine

oil quality and viscosity.

Use of engine oils for all petrol

engines with only ACEA quality is

prohibited, since it can cause engine

damage under certain operating

conditions.

Select the appropriate engine oil

based on its quality and on the

minimum ambient temperature

3 277.

Additional engine oil additives

The use of additional engine oil

additives could cause damage and

invalidate the warranty.

274 Service and maintenance

Engine oil viscosity grades

The SAE viscosity grade gives

information of the thickness of the oil.

Multigrade oil is indicated by two

figures, e.g. SAE 5W-30. The first

figure, followed by a W, indicates the

low temperature viscosity and the

second figure the high temperature

viscosity.

Select the appropriate viscosity grade

depending on the minimum ambient

temperature 3 277.

All of the recommended viscosity

grades are suitable for high ambient

temperatures.

Coolant and antifreeze

Use only organic acid type-long life

coolant (LLC) antifreeze approved for

the vehicle. Consult a workshop.

The system is factory filled with

coolant designed for excellent

corrosion protection and frost

protection down to approx. -28 °C. In

cold regions with very low

temperatures the factory filled coolant

provides frost protection down to

approx. -37 °C. This concentration

should be maintained all year round.

The use of additional coolant

additives that intend to give additional

corrosion protection or seal against

minor leaks can cause function

problems. Liability for consequences

resulting from the use of additional

coolant additives will be rejected.

Washer fluid

Use only washer fluid approved for

the vehicle to prevent damage of

wiper blades, paintwork, plastic and

rubber parts. Consult a workshop.

Brake and clutch fluid

Over time, brake fluid absorbs

moisture which will reduce braking

effectiveness. The brake fluid should

therefore be replaced at the specified

interval.

Technical data 275

Technical data

Vehicle identification .................. 275

Vehicle identification number ..275

Identification plate ................... 276

Engine identification ................ 276

Vehicle data ............................... 277

Recommended fluids and

lubricants ................................ 277

Engine data ............................. 280

Performance ............................ 281

Vehicle dimensions ................. 283

Capacities ................................ 284

Tyre pressures ........................ 285

Vehicle identification

number

The illustrations show different

versions.

The vehicle identification number

may be stamped on the identification

plate and on the floor pan, under the

floor covering, visible under a cover.

The vehicle identification number

may be embossed on the instrument

panel, visible through the windscreen,

or in the engine compartment on the

right body panel.

276 Technical data

Identification plate

The identification plate is located on

the front left or right door frame.

Information on identification label:

1: manufacturer

2: type approval number

3: vehicle identification number

4: permissible gross vehicle weight

rating in kg

5: permissible gross train weight

in kg

6: maximum permissible front axle

load in kg

7: maximum permissible rear axle

load in kg

8: vehicle-specific or country-

specific data

The combined total of front and rear

axle loads must not exceed the

permissible gross vehicle weight.

Vehicle's kerb weight depends on the

specification of the vehicle, e.g.

optional equipment and accessories.

Refer to the EEC Certificate of

Conformity provided with your vehicle

or other national registration

documents.

The technical data is determined in

accordance with European

Community standards. We reserve

the right to make modifications.

Specifications in the vehicle

documents always have priority over

those given in this manual.

Engine identification

The technical data tables use the

engine identifier code. The engine

data table additionally shows the

engineering code.

Engine data 3 280.

To identify the respective engine,

refer to the EEC Certificate of

Conformity provided with your vehicle

or other national registration

documents.

The Certificate of Conformity shows

the engine identifier code, other

national publications may show the

engineering code. Check piston

displacement and engine power to

identify the respective engine.

Technical data 277

Vehicle data

Recommended fluids and lubricants

European service schedule

Required engine oil quality

All European countries with European service interval 3 272

Engine oil quality Petrol engines

F12SHL, F12SHR, F12SHT

B14XFT

Petrol engine

F14SHT

Petrol engine

B16SHT

Diesel engines

dexos1 Gen2 ✔ – ✔ –

dexos2 – – – –

OV0401547 – ✔ ✔ ✔

In case of dexos or OV0401547 quality is unavailable you may use max. 1l engine oil ACEA A3/B3 or C3 for petrol engines

and ACEA C5 for diesel engines.

278 Technical data

Engine oil viscosity grades

All countries with European service interval 3 272

Petrol engines

F12SHL, F12SHR, F12SHT

Petrol engine

F14SHT

Petrol engine

B14XFT, B16SHT

Diesel engines

Viscosity SAE 0W-30

SAE 5W-30

SAE 0W-20 SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-30

SAE 5W-30

SAE 0W-40

SAE 5W-40

SAE 0W-20

International service schedule

Required engine oil quality

All European countries with European service interval 3 272

Engine oil quality Petrol engines

F12SHL, F12SHR, F12SHT

B14XFT

Petrol engine

F14SHT

Petrol engine

B16SHT

Diesel engines

dexos1 Gen2 ✔ – ✔ –

dexos2 – – – –

OV0401547 – ✔ ✔ ✔

In case of dexos or OV0401547 quality is unavailable you may use max. 1l engine oil ACEA A3/B3 or C3 for petrol engines

and ACEA C5 for diesel engines.

Technical data 279

Engine oil viscosity grades

All countries with European service interval 3 272

Petrol engines

F12SHL, F12SHR, F12SHT

Petrol engine

F14SHT

Petrol engine

B14XFT, B16SHT

Diesel engines

Viscosity SAE 0W-30

SAE 5W-30

SAE 0W-20 SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-30

SAE 0W-40

SAE 0W-20

280 Technical data

Engine data

Engine identifier code F12SHL F12SHR F12SHT F14SHT B14XFTB16SHT

Sales designation 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.35 1.41.6

Piston displacement [cm3]1199 1199 1199 1342 13991399

Engine power [kW] 81 107 96 107 110147

at rpm 4500 5500 5500 5000 -6000 5000-56005500

Torque [Nm] 195 225 225 236 230280

at rpm 2000-3500 2000-3500 2000-3500 1500-3500 2000-40001650-4500

Fuel type Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol PetrolPetrol

Octane rating RON1)

recommended 95 95 95 95 9598

possible 98 98 98 98 9895

possible 91 91 91 91 9191

Additional fuel type – – – – ––

1) A country-specific label at the fuel filler flap can supersede the engine-specific requirement.

Technical data 281

Engine identifier code F15DVC F15DVH

Sales designation 1.5 1.5

Piston displacement [cm3]1496 1496

Engine power [kW] 77 90

at rpm 3250 3500

Torque [Nm] 260 3002) / 285 3)

at rpm 1500-2500 1750-25002) /

1500-27503)

Fuel type Diesel Diesel

2) MT

3) AT

Performance

5-door Hatchback

Engine F12SHL F12SHR F12SHT F14SHT B14XFT B16SHT

Maximum speed [km/h]

Manual transmission 200 215 210 215 210 235

Automatic transmission – – – 210 – –

282 Technical data

Engine F15DVC F15DVH

Maximum speed [km/h]

Manual transmission 200 210

Automatic transmission – 205

Sports Tourer

Engine F12SHL F12SHR F12SHT F14SHT

Maximum speed [km/h]

Manual transmission 200 215 210 215

Automatic transmission – – 210 210

Engine F15DVC F15DVH

Maximum speed [km/h]

Manual transmission 200 210

Automatic transmission – 205

Technical data 283

Vehicle dimensions

5-door hatchback Sports Tourer

Length min.-max. [mm] 4370 4702

Width with folded exterior mirrors [mm] 1809 1809

Width with unfolded exterior mirrors [mm] 2042 2042

Height (without antenna) [mm] 1437-1531 1452-1580

Vehicle height - Rear compartment open [mm] 2016 2060

Length of load compartment floor [mm] 828 1065

Length of load compartment with folded rear seats [mm] 1575 1872

Load compartment width [mm] 1001 1028

Load compartment height [mm] 600 747

Wheelbase [mm] 2662 2662

Turning circle diameter [m] 11.44 11.44

284 Technical data

Capacities

Engine oil

Engine F12SHL,

F12SHR,

F12SHT,

F14SHT,

B14XFT

B16SHT Diesel engines

including filter [l] 4.0 5.5 5.0

between MIN and MAX [l] 1.0 1.0 1.0

Fuel tank

Petrol/diesel, refilling quantity [l] 48

Petrol, refilling quantity [l] 14

AdBlue tank

5-door hatchback Sports Tourer

AdBlue, refilling quantity [l] 12.5 13.5

Technical data 285

Tyre pressures

Comfort with up to

3 people ECO with up to 3 people With full load

Engine Tyres front rear front rear front rear

[kPa/bar] [kPa/bar] [kPa/bar] [kPa/bar] [kPa/bar] [kPa/bar]

F12SHL,

F12SHR,

F12SHT,

F14SHT,

F15DVC,

F15DVH

195/65 R15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 250/2.5 250/2.5 280/2.8 290/2.9

205/55 R16

225/45 R17

225/40 R18

230/2.3 210/2.1 250/2.5 230/2.3 280/2.8 290/2.9

B14XFT 195/65 R15,

225/45 R17,

215/55 R16,

215/50 R17,

225/40 R18

220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5

(36) 270/2.7

(39)

205/55 R16 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5

(36) 270/2.7

(39)

286 Technical data

Comfort with up to

3 people ECO with up to 3 people With full load

Engine Tyres front rear front rear front rear

[kPa/bar] [kPa/bar] [kPa/bar] [kPa/bar] [kPa/bar] [kPa/bar]

B16SHT 225/45 R17 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5

(36) 270/2.7

(39)

225/40 R18 260/2.6 (38) 240/2.4 (35) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7

(39) 290/2.9

(42)

205/55 R16 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5

(36) 270/2.7

(39)

All Temporary spare

wheel

115/70 R16

420/4.2 420/4.2 – – 420/4.2 420/4.2

Customer information 287

Customer

information

Customer information ................ 287

Declaration of conformity ......... 287

REACH .................................... 291

Software acknowledgement .... 291

Software update ...................... 293

Registered trademarks ............ 294

Vehicle data recording and pri‐

vacy ........................................... 294

Event data recorders ............... 294

Radio Frequency Identification

(RFID) ..................................... 297

Customer information

Declaration of conformity

Radio transmission systems

This vehicle has systems that

transmit and / or receive radio waves

subject to Directive 2014/53/EU. The

manufacturers of the systems listed

below declare conformity with

Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of

the EU declaration of conformity for

each system is available at the

following internet address:

www.opel.com/conformity.

Importer is

Opel / Vauxhall, Bahnhofsplatz,

65423 Ruesselsheim am Main,

Germany.

Antenna

Laird

8100 Industrial Park Drive, Grand

Blanc, MI, 48439, USA

Operation frequency: N/A

Maximum output: N/A

Antenna

Kathrein Automotive North America,

Inc.

3967 W. Hamlin Rd., Rochester Hills,

MI 48309, USA

Operation frequency: N/A

Maximum output: N/A

Electronic key

Denso Coperation

Waldeckerstraße 11, 64546

Mörfelden-Walldorf, Germany

Operation frequency: 433,92 MHz

Maximum output: -5,88 dBm

Electronic key module

Denso Coperation

Waldeckerstraße 11, 64546

Mörfelden-Walldorf, Germany

Operation frequency: 125 kHz

Maximum output: -0,14 dBm

Front radar unit

Continental Automotive GmbH

ADC Automotive Distance Control

Systems GmbH, Peter-Dornier-

Straße 10, 88131 Lindau, Germany

288 Customer information

Operation frequency: 76-77 GHz

Maximum output: 30 EIRP dBm

Immobiliser

Bosch

Robert Bosch GmbH, Robert Bosch

Platz 1, 70839 Gerlingen, Germany

Operation frequency: 125 kHz

Maximum output:

5.1 dBµA/m @ 10 m

Infotainment system Multimedia

LG Electronics

European Shared Service Center

B.V., Krijgsman 1, 1186 DM

Amstelveen, The Netherlands

Operation

frequency (MHz) Maximum output

(dBm)

2400.0 - 2483.5 8

2400.0 - 2483.5 16

5725.0 - 5875.0 9

Infotainment system Multimedia Navi

Electronics European Shared Service

Center B.V., Krijgsman 1, 1186 DM

Amstelveen, The Netherlands

Operation

frequency (MHz) Maximum output

(dBm)

2402.0 - 2480.0 4

2400.0 - 2483.5 13

5725.0 - 5850.0 13

Infotainment system

Multimedia Navi Pro

Harman International Industries

Becker-Goering-Str. 16, 76307

Karlsbad, Germany

Operation

frequency (MHz) Maximum output

(dBm)

2400.0 - 2483.5 9

2400.0 - 2483.5 19

5725.0 - 5875.0 13.9

Parking heater remote conrtol

receiver

Webasto Thermo & Comfort SE

Friedrichshafener Straße 9, 82205

Gilching, Germany

Operation frequency: N/A

Maximum output: N/A

Parking heater remote conrtol

transmitter

Webasto Thermo & Comfort SE

Friedrichshafener Straße 9, 82205

Gilching, Germany

Operation frequency: 869,0 MHz

Maximum output: 14 dBm

Radio remote control receiver

Robert Bosch GmbH

Robert Bosch Platz 1, 70839

Gerlingen, Germany

Operation frequency: 433.92 MHz

Maximum output: N/A

Radio remote control transmitter

Robert Bosch GmbH

Robert Bosch Platz 1, 70839

Gerlingen, Germany

Operation frequency: 433.92 MHz

Maximum output: -9 dbm

Customer information 289

Tyre pressure sensors

Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co.

Gewerbestraße 40, 75015 Bretten-

Gölshausen, Germany

Operation frequency: 433.92 MHz

Maximum output: 83 dBuV/m

290 Customer information

Jack

Customer information 291

Translation of the original declaration

of conformity

Declaration of conformity according

to EC Directive 2006/42/EC

We declare that the product:

Product designation: Jack

Type/GM part number: 13512620

is in compliance with the provisions of

Directive 2006/42/EC.

Applied technical standards:

GMN9737 : jacking

GM 14337 : standard equipment

jack – hardware

tests

GMN5127 : vehicle integrity –

hoisting and service

station jacking

GMW15005 : standard equipment

jack and spare tyre,

vehicle test

ISO TS 16949 : quality

management

systems

The signatory is authorised to

compile the technical documentation.

Rüsselsheim, 27th November 2015

signed by

André-Alexander Konter

Engineering Group Manager Tyre

and Wheel Systems

Adam Opel AG

D-65423 Rüsselsheim

CRAN type approval numbers

List of all Communications

Regulatory Authority of Namibia

(CRAN) type approval numbers:

TA-2017/3397, TA-2017/3398,

TA-2017/3399, TA-2017/3443

REACH

Registration, Evaluation,

Authorisation and Restriction of

Chemicals (REACH) is a European

Union regulation adopted to improve

the protection of human health and

the environment from the risks that

can be posed by chemicals. Visit

www.opel.com/reach for further

information and for access to the

Article 33 communication.

Software acknowledgement

Certain OnStar components include

libcurl and unzip software and other

third party software. Below are the

notices and licenses associated with

libcurl and unzip and for other third

party software please see http://

www.lg.com/global/support/

opensource/index.

libcurl

Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.

292 Customer information

Permission to use, copy, modify, and

distribute this software for any

purpose with or without fee is hereby

granted, provided that the above

notice appear in all copies.

The software is provided "as is",

without warranty of any kind, express

or implied, including but not limited to

the warranties of merchantability,

fitness for a particular purpose and

noninfringement of third party rights.

In no event shall the authors or

claim, damages or other liability,

whether in an action of contract, tort

or otherwise, arising from, out of or in

connection with the software or the

use or other dealings in the software.

Except as contained in this notice, the

name of a copyright holder shall not

be used in advertising or otherwise to

promote the sale, use or other

dealings in this Software without prior

written authorization of the copyright

holder.

unzip

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the

Info-ZIP copyright and license. The

definitive version of this document

should be available at ftp://ftp.info-

zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html

indefinitely.

rights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyright and

license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as the

following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,

Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,

Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed

Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth,

Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert

Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul

Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny

Lee, Onno van der Linden, Igor

Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio

Monesi, Keith Owens, George

Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe

Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave

Smith, Steven M. Schweda, Christian

Spieler, Cosmin Truta, Antoine

Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich

Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”

without warranty of any kind, express

or implied. In no event shall Info-ZIP

or its contributors be held liable for

any direct, indirect, incidental, special

or consequential damages arising out

of the use of or inability to use this

software.

Permission is granted to anyone to

use this software for any purpose,

including commercial applications,

and to alter it and redistribute it freely,

subject to the following restrictions:

1. Redistributions of source code

must retain the above copyright

notice, definition, disclaimer, and

this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form

(compiled executables) must

reproduce the above copyright

notice, definition, disclaimer, and

this list of conditions in

documentation and/or other

materials provided with the

distribution. The sole exception to

this condition is redistribution of a

standard UnZipSFX binary

(including SFXWiz) as part of a

self-extracting archive; that is

Customer information 293

permitted without inclusion of this

license, as long as the normal

SFX banner has not been

removed from the binary or

disabled.

3. Altered versions--including, but

not limited to, ports to new

operating systems, existing ports

with new graphical interfaces, and

dynamic, shared, or static library

versions--must be plainly marked

as such and must not be

misrepresented as being the

original source. Such altered

versions also must not be

misrepresented as being Info-ZIP

releases--including, but not

limited to, labeling of the altered

versions with the names “Info-

ZIP” (or any variation thereof,

including, but not limited to,

different capitalizations), “Pocket

UnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip” without

the explicit permission of Info-ZIP.

Such altered versions are further

prohibited from misrepresentative

use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-

mail addresses or of the Info-ZIP

URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use

the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”

“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”

“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and

“MacZip” for its own source and

binary releases.

Software update

The Infotainment system can

download and install selected

software updates over a wireless

connection.

Note

The availability of these over-the-air

vehicle software updates varies by

vehicle and country. Find more

information on our home page.

Internet connection

Downloading over-the-air vehicle

software updates requires internet

connectivity, which can be accessed

through the vehicle’s built-in OnStar

connection or another password-

protected Wi-Fi hotspot, e.g. provided

by a mobile phone.

To connect the Infotainment system

to a hotspot, select Settings on the

home screen, Wi-Fi and then Manage

Wi-Fi Networks. Select the desired

Wi-Fi network, and follow the on-

screen prompts.

Updates

The system will prompt for certain

updates to be downloaded and

installed. There is also an option to

check for updates manually.

To manually check for updates, select

Settings on the home screen,

Software Information and then

System Update. Follow the on-screen

prompts.

Note

Steps for downloading and installing

updates may vary by vehicle.

Note

During the installation process, the

vehicle may not be operational.

294 Customer information

Registered trademarks

Apple Inc.

Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of

Apple Inc.

App Store® and iTunes Store® are

registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

iPhone®, iPod®, iPod touch®, iPod

nano®, iPad® and Siri® are registered

trademarks of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark

of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

DivX, LLC

DivX® and DivX Certified® are

registered trademarks of DivX, LLC.

EnGIS Technologies, Inc.

BringGo® is a registered trademark of

EnGIS Technologies, Inc.

Google Inc.

Android™ and Google Play™ Store

are trademarks of Google Inc.

Stitcher Inc.

Stitcher™ is a trademark of Stitcher,

Inc.

Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V.

AdBlue® is a registered trademark of

the VDA.

Vehicle data recording

and privacy

Event data recorders

Electronic control units are installed in

your vehicle. Control units process

data which is received by vehicle

sensors, for example, or which they

generate themselves or exchange

amongst themselves. Some control

units are necessary for the safe

functioning of your vehicle, others

assist you while you drive (driver

assistance systems), while others

provide comfort or infotainment

functions.

The following contains general

information about data processing in

the vehicle. You will find additional

information as to which specific data

is uploaded, stored and passed on to

third parties and for what purpose in

your vehicle under the key word Data

Protection closely linked to the

references for the affected functional

characteristics in the relevant owner's

manual or in the general terms of

sale. These are also available online.

Customer information 295

Operating data in the vehicle

Control units process data for

operation of the vehicle.

This data includes, e.g.:

● vehicle status information (e.g.

wheel rotation rate, speed,

movement delay, lateral

acceleration, "seatbelts

fastened" display),

● ambient conditions (e.g.

temperature, rain sensor,

distance sensor).

As a rule such data is transient, not

stored for longer than an operational

cycle, and only processed on board

the vehicle itself. Control units often

include data storage (including the

vehicle key). This is used to allow

information to be documented

temporarily or permanently on vehicle

condition, component stress,

maintenance requirements and

technical events and errors.

Depending on the technical

equipment level, the data stored is as

follows:

● system component operating

states (e.g. fill level, tyre

pressure, battery status)

● faults and defects in important

system components (e.g. lights,

brakes)

● system reactions in special

driving situations (e.g. triggering

of an airbag, actuation of the

stability control systems)

● information on events damaging

the vehicle

● for electric vehicles the amount of

charge in the high-voltage

battery, estimated range

In special cases (e.g. if the vehicle

has detected a malfunction), it may be

necessary to save data that would

otherwise just be volatile.

When you use services (e.g. repairs,

maintenance), the operating data

saved can be read together with the

vehicle identification number and

used when necessary. Staff working

for the service net-work (e.g. garages,

manufacturers) or third parties (e.g.

breakdown services) can read the

data from the vehicle. The same

applies to warranty work and quality

assurance measures.

Data is generally read via the OBD

(On-Board Diagnostics) port

prescribed by law in the vehicle. The

operating data which is read out,

documents the technical condition of

the vehicle or individual components

and assists with fault diagnosis,

compliance with warranty obligations

and quality improvement. This data,

in particular information on

component stress, technical events,

operator errors and other faults, is

transmitted to the manufacturer

where appropriate, together with the

vehicle identification number. The

manufacturer is also subject to

product liability. The manufacturer

potentially also uses operating data

from vehicles for product recalls. This

data can also be used to check

customer warranty and guarantee

claims.

296 Customer information

Fault memories in the vehicle can be

reset by a service company when

carrying out servicing or repairs or at

your request.

Comfort and infotainment

functions

Comfort settings and custom settings

can be stored in the vehicle and

changed or reset at any time.

Depending on the equipment level in

question, these include

● seat and steering wheel position

settings

● chassis and air conditioning

settings

● custom settings such as interior

lighting

You can input your own data in the

infotainment functions for your

vehicle as part of the selected

features.

Depending on the equipment level in

question, these include

● multimedia data such as music,

videos or photos for playback in

an integrated multimedia system

● address book data for use with an

integrated hands-free system or

an integrated navigation system

● input destinations

● data on the use of online services

This data for comfort and

infotainment functions can be stored

locally in the vehicle or be kept on a

device that you have connected to the

vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB stick

or MP3 player). Data that you have

input yourself can be deleted at any

time.

This data can only be transmitted out

of the vehicle at your request,

particularly when using online

services in accordance with the

settings selected by you.

Smartphone integration, e.g.

Android Auto or Apple CarPlay

If your vehicle is equipped

accordingly, you can connect your

smartphone or another mobile device

to the vehicle so that you can control

it via the controls integrated in the

vehicle. The smartphone image and

sound can be output via the

multimedia system in this case. At the

same time, specific information is

transmitted to your smartphone.

Depending on the type of integration,

this includes data such as position

data, day / night mode and other

general vehicle information. For more

information, please see the operating

instructions for the vehicle /

infotainment system.

Integration allows selected

smartphone apps to be used, such as

navigation or music playback. No

further integration is possible

between smartphone and vehicle, in

particular active access to vehicle

data. The nature of further data

processing is determined by the

provider of the app used. Whether

you can define settings, and if so

Customer information 297

which ones, is dependent on the app

in question and your smartphone's

operating system.

Online services

If your vehicle has a radio network

connection, this allows data to be

exchanged between your vehicle and

other systems. The radio network

connection is made possible by

means of a transmitter device in your

vehicle or a mobile device provided

by you (e.g. a smartphone). Online

functions can be used via this radio

network connection. These include

online services and applications /

apps provided to you by the

manufacturer or other providers.

Proprietary services

In the case of the manufacturer's

online services, the relevant functions

are described by the manufacturer in

an appropriate location (e.g. Owner's

Manual, the manufacturer's website)

and the associated data protection

information is provided. Personal

data may be used to provide online

services. Data exchange for this

purpose takes place via a protected

connection, e.g. using the

manufacturer's IT systems provided

for the purpose. Collection,

processing and use of personal data

for the purposes of preparation of

services take place solely on the

basis of legal permission, e.g. in the

case of a legally prescribed

emergency communication system or

a contractual agreement, or by virtue

of consent.

You can activate or deactivate the

services and functions (which are

subject to charges to some extent)

and, in some cases, the vehicle's

entire radio network connection. This

does not include statutory functions

and services such as an emergency

communication system.

Third party services

If you make use of online services

from other providers (third parties),

these services are subject to the

liability and data protection and usage

conditions of the provider in question.

The manufacturer frequently has no

influence over the content exchanged

in this regard.

Therefore, please note the nature,

scope and purpose of the collection

and use of personal data within the

scope of third party services provided

by the service provider in question.

Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID)

RFID technology is used in some

vehicles for functions such as tyre

pressure monitoring and immobiliser.

It is also used in connection with

conveniences such as radio remote

controls for door locking / unlocking

and starting. RFID technology in Opel

vehicles does not use or record

personal information or link with any

other Opel system containing

personal information.

298

Index A

Accessories and vehicle

modifications .......................... 222

Active emergency braking.......... 190

Adaptive cruise control....... 114, 179

AdBlue................................ 112, 163

Adjustable air vents ................... 149

Airbag and belt tensioners ......... 109

Airbag deactivation .............. 65, 109

Airbag label................................... 60

Airbag system .............................. 60

Air conditioning regular

operation ................................ 150

Air conditioning system .............. 141

Air intake .................................... 150

Air vents...................................... 149

Antilock brake system ................ 170

Antilock brake system (ABS) ..... 111

Anti-theft alarm system ................ 37

Anti-theft locking system .............. 37

Appearance care........................ 267

Armrest................................... 55, 57

Armrest storage ........................... 74

Ashtrays ..................................... 101

Automatic anti-dazzle .................. 42

Automatic light control ............... 131

Automatic locking ........................ 30

Automatic transmission ............. 166

Autostop..................................... 157

Auxiliary heater........................... 149

Baselevel display........................ 115

Battery discharge protection ...... 140

Battery voltage ........................... 123

Belts.............................................. 58

BlueInjection............................... 163

Bonnet ....................................... 224

Brake and clutch fluid................. 273

Brake and clutch system ........... 110

Brake assist ............................... 172

Brake fluid .................................. 227

Brakes ............................... 170, 227

Breakdown.................................. 265

Bulb replacement ....................... 230

Capacities .................................. 284

Cargo management system ........ 84

Catalytic converter ..................... 163

Central locking system ................ 25

Centre console lighting .............. 139

Changing tyre and wheel size ...254

Charging system ........................ 110

Child locks ................................... 31

Child restraint installation

locations ................................... 69

Child restraints.............................. 67

Child restraint systems ................ 67

Climate control ............................. 16

Clock............................................. 97

299

Control indicators........................ 108

Control of the vehicle ................. 152

Controls........................................ 93

Convex shape .............................. 40

Coolant and antifreeze............... 273

Cruise control .................... 114, 176

Cupholders .................................. 73

Curtain airbag system .................. 65

Curve lighting.............................. 134

Danger, Warnings and Cautions ...4

Daytime running lights ............... 134

Declaration of conformity............ 287

DEF............................................ 163

Diesel exhaust fluid.................... 163

Diesel fuel system bleeding ....... 229

Door open .................................. 115

Doors............................................ 32

Driver assistance systems.......... 176

Driver Information Centre........... 115

Driving characteristics and

towing tips .............................. 217

Driving hints................................ 152

Electric adjustment ...................... 40

Electrical system......................... 241

Electric parking brake......... 110, 171

Electric parking brake fault......... 110

Electronic climate control system 143

Electronic driving programmes ..168

Electronic key system................... 23

Electronic Stability Control.......... 174

Electronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system.......... 111

Electronic Stability Control off..... 111

Emergency call........................... 129

End-of-life vehicle recovery ....... 223

Engine compartment fuse box ... 242

Engine coolant ........................... 226

Engine coolant temperature ...... 112

Engine coolant temperature

gauge ..................................... 106

Engine data ............................... 280

Engine exhaust .......................... 161

Engine identification................... 276

Engine oil ................... 225, 273, 277

Engine oil pressure .................... 112

Entry lighting .............................. 139

Event data recorders.................. 294

Exhaust filter............................... 161

Exit lighting ................................ 139

Exterior care .............................. 267

Exterior light ............................... 113

Exterior lighting .................... 13, 130

Exterior mirrors............................. 40

Fault ........................................... 168

First aid kit ................................... 88

Fixed air vents ........................... 149

Floor mats................................... 269

Folding mirrors ............................. 41

Following distance...................... 111

Following distance indication...... 189

Forward collision alert................. 187

Front airbag system ..................... 64

Front fog lights ........... 114, 136, 232

Front pedestrian protection........ 193

Front seats.................................... 49

Front storage................................ 74

Fuel............................................. 212

Fuel for diesel engines .............. 214

Fuel for petrol engines ............... 212

Fuel gauge ................................. 106

Fuses ......................................... 241

Gauges....................................... 104

Gear selection ........................... 167

Gear shifting............................... 111

General information ................... 216

Glovebox ..................................... 73

Halogen headlights .................... 230

Hand brake......................... 170, 171

Hazard warning flashers ............ 135

Headlight flash ........................... 133

Headlight range adjustment ...... 133

Headlights................................... 130

300

Headlights when driving abroad 133

Head restraint adjustment ............. 8

Head restraints ............................ 48

Heated mirrors ............................. 41

Heated rear window ..................... 45

Heated steering wheel ................. 93

Heated windscreen....................... 45

Heating .................................. 56, 58

High beam ......................... 113, 133

High beam assist................ 113, 131

Hill start assist ........................... 172

Horn ....................................... 14, 94

Identification plate ..................... 276

Ignition switch positions ............. 152

Immobiliser .......................... 40, 113

Indicators.................................... 104

Inductive charging...................... 100

Info Display................................. 121

Information displays.................... 115

Instrument cluster ...................... 101

Instrument panel fuse box ......... 244

Instrument panel illumination

control .................................... 137

Instrument panel overview ........... 10

Interior care ............................... 269

Interior lighting............................ 137

Interior lights ...................... 138, 240

Interior mirrors.............................. 42

Interruption of power supply ...... 169

Introduction .................................... 3

Jump starting ............................. 263

Key, memorised settings.............. 25

Keys ............................................. 21

Keys, locks................................... 21

Lane keep assist................ 111, 210

Lashing eyes ............................... 83

LED headlights................... 113, 134

Lighting features......................... 139

Light switch ................................ 130

Load compartment ................ 32, 75

Load compartment cover ............. 81

Load compartment fuse box ...... 245

Loading information ..................... 90

Low fuel ..................................... 113

Malfunction indicator light .......... 110

Manual anti-dazzle ...................... 42

Manual mode ............................. 168

Manual seat adjustment............... 50

Manual transmission .................. 169

Manual windows .......................... 43

Massage....................................... 57

Maximum speed......................... 249

Memorised settings...................... 25

Mirror adjustment ........................... 9

Misted light covers ..................... 137

New vehicle running-in .............. 152

Number plate light ..................... 240

Object detection systems........... 195

Odometer ................................... 105

Oil, engine.......................... 273, 277

Outside temperature .................... 97

Overrun cut-off ........................... 157

Parking ................................ 19, 160

Parking assist ............................ 195

Parking brake ............................ 171

Parking lights ............................. 137

Particulate filter........................... 161

Pedestrian detection................... 114

Performance .............................. 281

Performing work ........................ 224

Power button.............................. 153

Power outlets ............................... 99

Power seat adjustment ................ 52

Power windows ............................ 43

Preheating ................................. 112

Puncture..................................... 259

301

Quickheat................................... 149

Radio Frequency Identification

(RFID)..................................... 297

Radio remote control ................... 22

REACH....................................... 291

Reading lights ............................ 138

Rear floor storage cover .............. 82

Rear fog light ............. 114, 136, 233

Rear seats.................................... 57

Rear view camera ...................... 204

Rear window wiper and washer ..96

Recommended fluids and

lubricants ........................ 273, 277

Refuelling ................................... 214

Registered trademarks............... 294

Retained power off..................... 155

Reversing lights ......................... 137

Ride control systems.................. 173

Roof.............................................. 46

Roof load...................................... 90

Roof rack ..................................... 89

Safety belts................................... 58

Safety net .................................... 86

Seat adjustment ............................. 7

Seat belt ........................................ 8

Seat belt reminder ..................... 108

Seat belts ..................................... 58

Seat heating

Seat heating, front..................... 56

Seat heating, rear..................... 58

Seat position ................................ 49

Selective catalytic reduction....... 163

Selector lever.............................. 167

Service ............................... 150, 272

Service display .......................... 107

Service information .................... 272

Side airbag system ...................... 64

Side blind spot alert.................... 203

Sidelights.................................... 130

Side turn lights ........................... 239

Software acknowledgement....... 291

Software update......................... 293

Spare wheel ............................... 259

Speed limiter....................... 114, 177

Speedometer ............................. 104

Starting and operating................ 152

Starting off ................................... 18

Starting the engine .................... 155

Steering...................................... 152

Steering wheel adjustment ...... 9, 93

Steering wheel controls ............... 93

Stop-start system........................ 157

Storage......................................... 73

Storage compartments................. 73

Sunroof ........................................ 46

Sun visor lights .......................... 138

Sun visors .................................... 45

Symbols ......................................... 4

Tachometer ............................... 106

Tail lights ................................... 233

Three-point seat belt .................... 59

Tools .......................................... 247

Tow bar....................................... 216

Towing................................ 216, 265

Towing another vehicle ............. 266

Towing equipment ..................... 218

Towing the vehicle ..................... 265

Traction Control system ............. 173

Traction Control system off......... 112

Traffic sign assistant........... 115, 206

Trailer coupling........................... 216

Trailer stability assist ................. 221

Trailer towing ............................. 217

Transmission ............................... 17

Transmission display ................. 166

Tread depth ............................... 253

Trip odometer ............................ 105

Turn lights .......................... 108, 136

Tyre chains ................................ 255

Tyre designations ...................... 249

Tyre pressure ............................ 249

Tyre pressure monitoring

system............................. 112, 251

302

Tyre pressures ........................... 285

Tyre repair kit ............................. 255

Ultrasonic parking assist............. 195

Upholstery.................................. 269

Uplevel display........................... 115

USB port....................................... 99

Using this manual .......................... 3

Vehicle battery ........................... 228

Vehicle checks............................ 224

Vehicle data................................ 277

Vehicle data recording and

privacy..................................... 294

Vehicle detected ahead.............. 114

Vehicle dimensions .................... 283

Vehicle identification number ....275

Vehicle jack................................ 247

Vehicle messages ..................... 122

Vehicle personalisation ............. 124

Vehicle security............................ 37

Vehicle specific data ...................... 3

Vehicle storage........................... 223

Vehicle tools............................... 247

Vehicle unlocking ........................... 6

Ventilating..................................... 56

Warning chimes ......................... 123

Warning lights............................. 104

Warning triangle .......................... 88

Washer and wiper systems ......... 14

Washer fluid ............................... 227

Wheel changing ......................... 258

Wheel covers ............................. 254

Wheels and tyres ....................... 249

Windows....................................... 42

Windscreen................................... 42

Windscreen wiper and washer .... 94

Winter tyres ............................... 249

Wiper blade replacement .......... 230

www.opel.com

The information contained in this publication is effective as of the date indicated below. Opel Automobile GmbH reserves the right to make changes to the technical specifications, features

and design of the vehicles relative to the information in this publication as well as changes to the publication itself.

Edition: October 2019, Opel Automobile GmbH, Rüsselsheim.

Printed on chlorine-free bleached paper.

*ID-OASKOBSE1910-EN*

ID-OASKOBSE1910-en

Opel Astra K 2022 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Opel Astra K 2022

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info